meyer & associates, inc. · 2019-06-17 · meyer & associates, inc. consulting engineers...

Meyer & Associates, Inc. Consulting Engineers Vernon F. Meyer, P.E. Richard T. Meyer, P.E. President Vice President

M.M. Issued for Bids 6/11/2019 (X)

By Revisions Date Date

Office Building

Waterworks District 14 of Ward 5, Parish of Calcasieu

MA Project No. H1-18091-DA

Board Members George Miller, President

Greg Gillis, Vice President Ruth Sparks

Brian Corbello Jeremy Istre

Operators

Donnie Johnson Randy Doyle

Office Manager Catherine Barks

PROJECT MANUAL & CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

WATERWORKS DISTRICT NO. 14 OF WARD 5, PARISH OF CALCASIEU

OFFICE BUILDING

M.A. PROJECT NO. H1-18091-DA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Color

COVER ................................................................................................................................. White

TABLE OF CONTENTS ...................................................................................................... White

BID PHASE DOCUMENTS

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS .......................................................................................... White

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ......................................................................................... White

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM ..................................................... White

BID BOND ........................................................................................................................... White

FORMS TO BE SUBMITTED WITHIN 10 DAYS OF THE BID OPENING

AFFIDAVITS

ATTESTATIONS: LA. R.S. 38:2227 PAST CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS

OF BIDDERS, & LA. R.S. 38:2212.10 VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYEES .............. Ivory

AFFIDAVIT FOR ATTESTING THAT PUBLIC CONTRACT WAS

NOT SECURED THROUGH THE EMPLOYMENT OR PAYMENT

OF A SOLICITOR ......................................................................................................... Ivory

POST BID CONTRACT RELATED DOCUMENTS

DESIGNATION OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR AS AGENT OF A

GOVERNMENTAL ENTITY AND EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE .................................. White

NOTICE OF AWARD .......................................................................................................... White

AGREEMENT/CONTRACT ............................................................................................... White

PERFORMANCE BOND ..................................................................................................... White

PAYMENT BOND ............................................................................................................... White

NOTICE TO PROCEED ...................................................................................................... White

WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE ........................................................................................... White

CHANGE ORDER ............................................................................................................... White

FIELD ORDER ..................................................................................................................... White

CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ........................................................ White

NOTICE BY OWNER OF ACCEPTANCE OF WORK ..................................................... White

RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT .............................................................................. White

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ....................................................................................... White

PROJECT MANUAL & CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE 2

GENERAL CONDITIONS

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................ Blue

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ................................................................................... Yellow

EXHIBIT SC-4.02 – GEOTECHNICAL REPORT ....................................................... Yellow

EXHIBIT SC-9.03A – DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITIES & LIMITATIONS

OF AUTHORITY OF RESIDENT PROJECT ENGINEER ......................................... Yellow

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 01 10 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ Green

SECTION 03 31 00 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE .......................................................... Green

SECTION 04 20 19 VENEER UNIT MASONRY ........................................................... Green

SECTION 05 40 00 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING ............................................ Green

SECTION 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES ....................................... Green

SECTION 08 17 00 DOOR HARDWARE ....................................................................... Green

SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS .................................................... Green

SECTION 08 53 13 VINYL WINDOWS ......................................................................... Green

SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ........................................................................... Green

SECTION 09 90 10 PAINTING ........................................................................................ Green

SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS ...................................................... Green

SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS ......................................... Green

SECTION 23 00 00 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS .................................................. Green

SECTION 26 00 01 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................................... Green

SECTION 26 00 02 DETAIL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................. Green

SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK ................................................................................. Green

SECTION 31 25 10 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN ................. Green

SECTION 32 31 11 CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE & OPERATOR................................ Green

SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCING ................................................................. Green

SECTION 32 92 19 TURF CONSTRUCTION ................................................................. Green

SECTION 33 34 23 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ........................................ Green

BID PHASE DOCUMENTS

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Waterworks District 14 of Ward 5, Parish of Calcasieu

P.O. Box 37

4352 Hwy. 12

Starks, LA 70661

Separate sealed Bids for Waterworks District 14, Office Building; M.A. Project No.

H1-18091-DA will be received by the Board of Commissioners, at the Waterworks District 14

Office Building, 4352 Hwy. 12, Starks, LA 70661 until 10:00 AM, on July 9, 2019, and then at

said time and at said office publicly opened and read aloud. Work consists of construction of an

office building.

Work Classification: Building Construction

Copies of the Bidding Documents may be examined and/or obtained at the office of Meyer &

Associates, Inc. located at 600 N. Cities Service Hwy., Sulphur, LA 70663. A Bidding Document

deposit of $50.00 is required. Bidders must obtain an original set of electronic or paper Bidding

Documents from the Owner or Engineer in order to submit a Bid.

Run Dates

Friday, June 14, 2019



/s/ George Miller, President

EJCDC C-200 Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts

Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

Prepared by

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE

and

Issued and Published Jointly by

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES

______________________

ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA

______________________

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS

_______________________

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE

A Practice Division of the

NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS

Endorsed by

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE



Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers

1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794

(703) 684-2882

www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005

(202) 347-7474

www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers

1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400

(800) 548-2723

www.asce.org

Associated General Contractors of America

2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308

(703) 548-3118

www.agc.org

The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four

EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE.

http://www.nspe.org/

http://www.acec.org/

http://www.asce.org/

http://www.agc.org/



Page iii

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................. 1

Article 2 – Copies of Bidding Documents ........................................................................................................ 1

Article 3 – Qualifications of Bidders ................................................................................................................ 1

Article 4 – Examination of Bidding Documents, Other Related Data, and Site .............................................. 2

Article 5 – Pre-Bid Conference ......................................................................................................................... 4

Article 6 – Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................................ 4

Article 7 – Interpretations and Addenda ........................................................................................................... 5

Article 8 – Bid Security ..................................................................................................................................... 5

Article 9 – Contract Times ................................................................................................................................ 5

Article 10 – Liquidated Damages ...................................................................................................................... 5

Article 11 – Substitute and “Or-Equal” Items ................................................................................................... 6

Article 12 – Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others ........................................................................................... 6

Article 13 – Preparation of Bid ......................................................................................................................... 7

Article 14 – Basis of Bid; Comparison of Bids ................................................................................................ 7

Article 15 – Submittal of Bid ............................................................................................................................ 8

Article 16 – Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ............................................................................................ 8

Article 17 – Opening of Bids ............................................................................................................................. 8

Article 18 – Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ......................................................................................... 9

Article 19 – Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract ................................................................................... 9

Article 20 – Contract Security and Insurance ................................................................................................... 9

Article 21 – Signing of Agreement ................................................................................................................... 9

Article 22 – Sales and Use Taxes .................................................................................................................... 10



Page iv

This page intentionally left blank



Page 1 of 10

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS

1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General

Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders

have the meanings indicated below:

A. Issuing Office – The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued and where the

bidding procedures are to be administered.

ARTICLE 2 – COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated in

the advertisement or invitation to bid may be obtained from the Issuing Office. Deposits on the

first set of Bidding Documents furnished bona fide prime Bidders will be fully refunded upon

return of the Bidding Documents no later than ten (10) days after receipt of Bids. On other sets

of Bidding Documents, the deposit less actual cost of reproduction, will be refunded upon return

of the Bidding Documents no later than ten (10) days after receipt of Bids.

2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor

Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of

incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.03 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do

so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license

for any other use.

ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

3.01 In accordance with LA RS 37:2163 all Bidders must certify that they hold an active contractor’s

license number unless an exemption to the referenced statute applies.

3.02 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, within ten (10) days of the bid

opening or within five (5) days of Owner’s request thereafter, Bidder shall submit written

evidence such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments, and such other data

as may be called for below, in the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, or in the Technical

Provisions. Bidder must also be prepared to submit evidence of Bidder’s qualification to do

business in the state where the Project is located.

3.03 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s

representations and certifications.

3.04 Within ten (10) days of the bid opening, and prior to award of the Contract, the apparent low

Bidder shall submit to the Owner a fully executed Attestation Affidavit as required by LA R.S.

38:2227 (Past Criminal Convictions of Bidders), LA R.S. 38:2212.10 (Verification of

Employees), LA R.S. 23:1726(B) (Certification regarding Unpaid Workers Compensation

Insurance) on the form provided in the Project Manual.



Page 2 of 10

3.05 Within ten (10) days of the bid opening and prior to award of the Contract, the apparent low

Bidder shall submit an affidavit required by LA R.S. 38:2224 attesting that public contract was

not secured through employment or payment of solicitor on the form provided in the Project

Manual.

ARTICLE 4 – EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA, AND

SITE

4.01 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. Those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

contiguous to the Site.

2. Those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).

B. Copies of reports and drawings referenced in Paragraph 4.01.A will be made available by

Owner to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract

Documents, but the “technical data” contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as

provided in Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions has been identified and established in

Paragraph 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or

conclusion Bidder draws from any “technical data” or any other data, interpretations, opinions,

or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.

4.02 Underground Facilities

A. Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to existing

Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based upon information and data

furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner,

or others, and Owner and Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or

completeness thereof unless it is expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary

Conditions.

4.03 Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. The Supplementary Conditions identify any reports and drawings known to Owner relating to a

Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site.

B. Copies of reports and drawings referenced in Paragraph 4.03.A will be made available by

Owner to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract

Documents, but the “technical data” contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as

provided in Paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions has been identified and established in

Paragraph 4.06 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or

conclusion Bidder draws from any “technical data” or any other data, interpretations, opinions,

or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.



Page 3 of 10

4.04 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders

with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, and Underground Facilities, and

possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated subsurface or

physical conditions appear in Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 of the General Conditions.

Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders

with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in

the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed

at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in

the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work, appear in Paragraph 4.06 of the

General Conditions.

4.05 On request, Owner will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such examinations,

investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for submission of a

Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon

completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies. Bidder shall comply with all

applicable Laws and Regulations relative to excavation and utility locates.

4.06 A. Reference is made to Article 7 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the

general nature of other work that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as

utilities and other prime contractors) that relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding

Documents. On request, Owner will provide to each Bidder for examination access to or

copies of contract documents (other than portions thereof related to price) for such other

work.

B. Paragraph 6.13.C of the General Conditions indicates that if an Owner safety

program exists, it will be noted in the Supplementary Conditions.

4.07 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and the other related data identified in the

Bidding Documents;

B. visit the Site and become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local, and Site

conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;

C. become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations

that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;

D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) that have been identified in

Paragraph 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions as containing reliable "technical data," and (2)

reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at the Site that have been

identified in the Paragraph 4.06 of the Supplementary Conditions as containing reliable

"technical data";



Page 4 of 10

E. consider the information known to Bidder; information commonly known to contractors doing

business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the

Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the

Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and

documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods,

techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including

applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction

expressly required by the Bidding Documents; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and

programs;

F. agree at the time of submitting its Bid that no further examinations, investigations, explorations,

tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work

at the price(s) bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and

conditions of the Bidding Documents;

G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner and others at the

Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;

H. promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that

Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by

Engineer is acceptable to Bidder; and

I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey

understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work.

4.08 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder

has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised

upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents and applying any

specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction that may be

shown or indicated or expressly required by the Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given

Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has

discovered in the Bidding Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Engineer are

acceptable to Bidder, and that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and

convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work.

ARTICLE 5 – PRE-BID CONFERENCE

5.01 A pre-Bid conference will not be held.

ARTICLE 6 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS

6.01 The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. Easements for permanent structures or

permanent changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless

otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required

for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and

equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor.



Page 5 of 10

ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to

Engineer in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in

response to such questions will be issued by Addenda supplied by facsimile transmission and

mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the Bidding

Documents. Questions received less than seven (7) working days prior to the date for opening of

Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other

interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.

7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Documents as deemed

advisable by Owner or Engineer.

ARTICLE 8 – BID SECURITY

8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five

(5) percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified check, cashier’s check,

or a Bid bond (on the form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs

5.01 and 5.02 of the General Conditions. Failure to use the attached form or meet the specified

requirements for the surety will result in the Bid being rejected as unresponsive to the

Specifications. The Bid security of any Bidder whose Bid is rejected as unresponsive will be

returned within seven (7) days after the Bid opening.

8.02 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the

Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security and met the other conditions of the

Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to

execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within 15

days after the Notice of Award, Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of

Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture shall be Owner’s

exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. The Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes to

have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of

seven days after the Effective Date of the Agreement or 45 days after the Bid opening,

whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned.

8.03 Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving

the award will be returned within seven (7) days after the Bid opening.

ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT TIMES

9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially

completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 10 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement.



Page 6 of 10

ARTICLE 11 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS

11.01 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described

in the Bidding Documents, or those substitute or “or-equal” materials and equipment approved

by Engineer. The materials and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a

standard of required type, function and quality to be met by any proposed substitute or “or-equal”

item. Whenever it is specified or described in the Bidding Documents that an “approved equal”

item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer,

application for the acceptance of the proposed substitute or or-equal will not be considered by

Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Whenever it is specified or described

in the Bidding Documents that a “prior approved equal” item of material or equipment may be

furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for the acceptance of the

proposed substitute or or-equal must be made in writing by the Bidder and must be received by

the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such

request shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions. The

burden of proof of the merit of the proposed item is upon Bidder. Engineer’s decision of approval

or disapproval of a proposed item will be final. If Engineer approves any proposed item, such

approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all prospective Bidders. Bidders shall not

rely upon approvals made in any other manner.

ARTICLE 12 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS

12.01 If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers,

individuals, or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance of a specified date prior to the

Effective Date of the Agreement, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so

requested, shall within ten (10) days after Bid opening, submit to Owner a list of all such

Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for

which such identification is required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement

with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each

such Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity if requested by Owner. If Owner or Engineer,

after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier,

individual, or entity, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent

Successful Bidder to submit a substitute, in which case apparent Successful Bidder shall submit

an acceptable substitute, without an increase in the Bid.

12.02 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the

Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers,

individuals, or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for

forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so

listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the

Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation of such

acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in Paragraph 6.06 of the

General Conditions.



Page 7 of 10

12.03 Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity

against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.

ARTICLE 13 – PREPARATION OF BID

13.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents. Additional copies may be obtained from

the Issuing Office.

13.02 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. A Bid

price shall be indicated for each item listed therein. In the case of optional alternatives the words

“No Bid,” “No Change,” or “Not Applicable” may be entered.

13.03 The Bid shall contain a corporate resolution of written evidence of authority of the person

signing the Bid in accordance with LA RS 38:2212.B(5).

13.04 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall

be filled in on the Bid Form.

ARTICLE 14 – BASIS OF BID; COMPARISON OF BIDS

14.01 Lump Sum

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis for the base Bid and include a separate price for

each alternate described in the Bidding Documents as provided for in the Bid Form. The price

for each alternate will be the amount added to or deleted from the base Bid if Owner selects the

alternate. In the comparison of Bids, alternates will be applied in the same order as listed in the

Bid form. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words.

14.02 Unit Price

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the Bid

schedule.

B. The total of all estimated prices will be the sum of the products of the estimated quantity of

each item and the corresponding unit price. The final quantities and Contract Price will be

determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions. The price for each

alternate will be the amount added to or deleted from the base Bid if Owner selects the

alternate. In the comparison of Bids, alternates will be applied in the same order as listed in the

Bid form.

C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in

favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and

the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between

words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words.



Page 8 of 10

14.03 Allowances

A. For cash allowances the Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for

Contractor's overhead, costs, profit, and other expenses on account of cash allowances, if any,

named in the Contract Documents, in accordance with Paragraph 11.02.B of the General

Conditions.

ARTICLE 15 – SUBMITTAL OF BID

15.01 With each copy of the Bidding Documents, a Bidder is furnished one separate unbound copy of

the Bid Form, and, if required, the Bid Bond Form. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be

completed and submitted with the Bid security.

15.02 A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in

the advertisement or invitation to bid and shall be enclosed in a plainly marked package with the

Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is

submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and

other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope

containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the

notation “BID ENCLOSED.”

15.03 In accordance with LA RS 37:2163, all Bidders shall show their contractor’s license number on

the bid envelope. Any bid that does not require the Bidder to hold an active contractor’s license

shall state the exemption on the bid envelope. Any Bid failing to meet these provisions will be

automatically rejected.

ARTICLE 16 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID

16.01 A Bid may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same

manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted

prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids.

16.02 If within 48 hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder furnishes a duly signed written notice

accompanied by sworn, written evidence to the Owner that demonstrates to the reasonable

satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its

Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the

Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work.

ARTICLE 17 – OPENING OF BIDS

17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and,

unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base

Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.



Page 9 of 10

ARTICLE 18 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for 45 days after the day of the Bid opening, but

Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of

this period.

ARTICLE 19 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT

19.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming,

nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner further reserves the right to reject the Bid

of any Bidder whom it finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible.

19.02 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different

names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in

more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection

of all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest.

19.03 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed

requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid

Form or prior to the Notice of Award.

19.04 In evaluating Bidders, Owner will consider the qualifications of Bidders and may consider the

qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities

proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and

other individuals or entities must be submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

19.05 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the

responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors,

Suppliers, individuals, or entities proposed for those portions of the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

19.06 If the Contract is to be awarded, Owner will award the Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder.

ARTICLE 20 – CONTRACT SECURITY AND INSURANCE

20.01 Article 5 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets

forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the

Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it shall be accompanied by such

bonds.

ARTICLE 21 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

21.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the

required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract

Documents which are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto. Within 15 days thereafter,

Successful Bidder shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement

and attached documents to Owner. Within ten days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully



Page 10 of 10

signed counterpart to Successful Bidder with a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate

identification.

ARTICLE 22 – SALES AND USE TAXES

22.01 Owner is exempt from Louisiana state sales and use taxes on materials and equipment to be

incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included in the Bid. Refer to Paragraph 6.10 of

the Supplementary Conditions for additional information.

22.02 In accordance with applicable rules adopted and promulgated by the Louisiana Department of

Revenue, the Owner shall designate the Contractor and all subcontractors as its agents for the

purchase and lease of materials, supplies or equipment for the project. The Contractor and all

subcontractors shall accept the agency designation. The designation and acceptance thereof shall

be made on the form prescribed by the Louisiana State Department of Revenue which form shall

be part of the contract between the Owner, and the Contractor. A copy of this form is included in

the Project Manual. The agency relationship between the Owner and the Contractor and all

subcontractors shall relieve the Contractor and subcontractors (1) from paying any state or local

sales or state or local use taxes on materials, supplies or equipment which is affixed to and/or

made a part of the real estate of the Project or Work or which is permanently incorporated into

the Project or Work and, (2) from paying any state or local use taxes on any materials, supplies or

equipment which is leased and used exclusively for the Project or Work. Accordingly, in

preparing their bids and computing costs, the Contractor and subcontractors shall not consider

sales and/or use taxes which would otherwise be due.

March 2018 Page 1 of 2

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM

TO: Waterworks District 14 of Ward 5,

Parish of Calcasieu

P.O. Box 37

4352 Hwy. 12

Starks, LA 70661

BID FOR: Office Building

M.A. Project No. H1-18091-DA

The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he; a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding

Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any

addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools,

appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and

completion of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by: Meyer & Associates, Inc.

and dated: April 2019.

Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA: (Enter the number the

Designer has assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging) __________________________________________ .

TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated “Base

Bid” * but not alternates) the sum of:

Dollars ($ )

ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices

designated as alternates in the unit price description.

Alternate No. 1 – Replace 14’ automatic gate & associated electrical with 14’ manual double gate for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ )

Alternate No. 2 – Delete all chain link fencing work for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ )

Alternate No. 3 – Delete HDPE storm drain piping and downspout connections for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ )

NAME OF BIDDER:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER **:

DATE:

THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE TO BE INCLUDED WITH THE SUBMISSION OF THIS LOUISIANA UNIFORM

PUBLIC WORK BID FORM:

* The Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices. Otherwise it is not required and need not be included

with the form. The number of unit prices that may be included is not limited and additional sheets may be included if needed.

** A CORPORATE RESOLUTION OF WRITTEN EVIDENCE of the authority of the person signing the bid for the public

work as prescribed by LA R.S. 38:2212(B)(5).

BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check as prescribed by LA RS 38:2218.A is attached to

and made a part of this bid.

TO: BID FOR:

n Base Bid or o Alt. # ____

QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity times Unit Price)

50 CY

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM

UNIT PRICE FORM

DESCRIPTION:

REF. NO.

Excavate weak areas in subgrade & replace with compacted select fill

2.2(01)

UNIT PRICE

Office Building

M.A. Project No. H1-18091-DA

Waterworks District 14 of Ward 5,

Parish of Calcasieu

P.O. Box 37

4352 Hwy. 12

Starks, LA 70661

UNIT PRICES: This form shall be used for any and all work required by the Bidding Documents and described as unit prices. Amounts shall be stated in figures and only in figures.

All quantities are estimated. The contractor will be paid based

upon actual quantities as verified by the Owner. 2 of 2P:\CPWW14\18091\DA\Specs\docx\421 Uniform Bid Form and Bid Tabulation.xlsx

January 2009

PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC C-430 Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form)

Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 2

BID BOND

Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

BIDDER (Name and Address):

SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):

OWNER (Name and Address):

BID

Bid Due Date:

Description (Project Name and Include Location):

BOND

Bond Number:

Date (Not earlier than Bid due date):

Penal sum $

(Words) (Figures)

Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this

Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

BIDDER SURETY

(Seal) (Seal)

Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

Note: Above addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional

parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.

PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC C-430 Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form)

Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 2 of 2

1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors,

and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of

the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this

Bond shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.

2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding

Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the

Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.

3. This obligation shall be null and void if:

3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or

any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding

Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or

3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or

3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents

(or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when

required by Paragraph 5 hereof).

4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after

receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable

promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.

5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of

Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award

including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid due date without Surety’s written

consent.

6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default

required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after Bid due

date.

7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in

the state in which the Project is located.

8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses

shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United

States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective

upon receipt by the party concerned.

9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the

authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and

deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.

10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any

applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at

length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall

govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.

11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.

FORMS TO BE SUBMITTED WITHIN

10 DAYS OF THE BID OPENING

2013 Page 1 of 2

Name of Project Project No.

STATE OF

PARISH OF

ATTESTATIONS AFFIDAVIT

Before me, the undersigned notary public, duly commissioned and qualified in and for the parish and state

aforesaid, personally came and appeared Affiant, who after being duly sworn, attested as follows:

LA. R.S. 38:2227 PAST CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS OF BIDDERS

A. No sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a

minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has

entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes:

(a) Public bribery (R.S. 14:118) (c) Extortion (R.S. 14:66)

(b) Corrupt influencing (R.S. 14:120) (d) Money laundering (R.S. 14:23)

B. Within the past five years from the project bid date, no sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director,

manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding

entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the

following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes, during the solicitation or execution of a contract or bid

awarded pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes:

(a) Theft (R.S. 14:67)

(b) Identity Theft (R.S. 14:67.16)

(c) Theft of a business record

(R.S.14:67.20)

(d) False accounting (R.S. 14:70)

(e) Issuing worthless checks

(R.S. 14:71)

(f) Bank fraud (R.S. 14:71.1)

(g) Forgery (R.S. 14:72)

(h) Contractors; misapplication of

payments (R.S. 14:202)

(i) Malfeasance in office (R.S. 14:134)

LA. R.S. 38:2212.10 Verification of Employees

A. At the time of bidding, Appearer is registered and participates in a status verification system to verify that all

new hires in the state of Louisiana are legal citizens of the United States or are legal aliens.

B. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall continue, during the term of the contract, to utilize a status verification

system to verify the legal status of all new employees in the state of Louisiana.

C. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall require all subcontractors to submit to it a sworn affidavit verifying

compliance with Paragraphs (A) and (B) of this Subsection.

2013 Page 2 of 2

Name of Project Project No.

LA. R.S. 23:1726(B) Certification Regarding Unpaid Workers Compensation Insurance

A. R.S. 23:1726 prohibits any entity against whom an assessment under Part X of Chapter 11 of Title 23 of the

Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 (Alternative Collection Procedures & Assessments) is in effect, and whose

right to appeal that assessment is exhausted, from submitting a bid or proposal for or obtaining any contract

pursuant to Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 and Chapters 16 and 17 of Title 39

of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950.

B. By signing this bid /proposal, Affiant certifies that no such assessment is in effect against the bidding / proposing

entity.

NAME OF BIDDER NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

DATE TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED

SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

Sworn to and subscribed before me by Affiant on the day of 20

Notary Public

M:\wpd\forms.ca\affidavit.wpd510 Affidavit.docx

AFFIDAVIT

FOR

ATTESTING THAT PUBLIC CONTRACT WAS NOT SECURED

THROUGH EMPLOYMENT OR PAYMENT OF SOLICITOR

To be executed by all contractors, subcontractors, persons, corporations, firms,

associations, or other organizations receiving value for services rendered in connection with this

project:

STATE OF

PARISH OR COUNTY OF

, Being first duly sworn,

deposes and says that:

(1) He is of (Title) (Company Name)

the/a Contractor, Subcontractor, Person, Corporation, Firm, Association, or other organization

receiving value for services rendered in connection with this Project;

(2) He employed no person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization, either

directly or indirectly, to secure this public contract under which he is to receive payment, other

than persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in connection with this project or in

securing this public contract were in the regular course of their duties for affiant; and

(3) That no part of the contract price to be received by affiant was paid or will be paid to

any person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization for soliciting the contract, other

than payment of their normal compensation to persons regularly employed by the affiant whose

services in connection with the project are/were in the normal course of their duties for affiant.

Signed:

Title:

SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED before me

this day of , 20 .

NOTARY PUBLIC

My Commission Expires

POST BID CONTRACT

RELATED DOCUMENTS

________________________________________________________________________________, an agency of the United

Legal Name of Government Entity

States government, or an agency, board, commission, or instrumentality of the State of Louisiana or its political subdivisions, including parishes, municipalities and school boards, does hereby designate the following contractor as its agent for the purpose of making sales tax exempt purchases on behalf of the governmental body:

Name of Contractor

Address

City

State

Zip

This designation of agency shall be effective for purchases of component construction materials, taxable services and leases and rentals of tangible personal property for the following named construction project:

Construction Project

Contract Number

This designation and acceptance of agency is effective for the period Beginning Date (mm/dd/yyyy)

End Date (mm/dd/yyyy)

Purchases for the named project during this period by the designated contractor shall be considered as the legal equivalent of purchases directly by the governmental body. Any materials purchased by this agent shall immediately, upon the vendor’s delivery to the agent, become the property of this government entity. This government entity, as principal, assumes direct liability to the vendor for the payment of any property, services, leases, or rentals made by this designated agent. This agreement does not void or supersede the obligations of any party created under any construction contract related to this project, including specifically any contractual obligation of the construction contractor to submit payment to the vendors of materials or services for the project.

This contractor-agent is not authorized to delegate this purchasing agency to others; separate designations of agency by this governmental entity are required for each contractor or sub-contractor who is to purchase on behalf of this governmental entity. The undersigned hereby certify that this designation is the entirety of the agency designation agreement between them. In order for a purchase for an eligible governmental entity through a designated agent to be eligible for sales tax exemption, the designation of agency must be made, accepted, and disclosed to the vendor before or at the time of the purchase transaction.

Designation of Agency Acceptance of Agency Signature of Authorized Designator

Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Signature of Contractor or Subcontractor Authorized Acceptor

Date (mm/dd/yyyy)

Name of Authorized Designator Name of Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s Acceptor

Name of Governmental Entity Name of Contractor

Address Address

City State Zip City State Zip

This designation of agency form, when properly executed by both the contractor and the governmental entity, shall serve as evidence of the sales tax exempt status that has been conferred onto the contractor. No other exemption certificate form is necessary to claim exemption from sales taxes. The agency agreement evidenced by this sales tax exemption certificate must be implemented at the time of contract execution with the governmental entity. The contract between the governmental entity and his agent must contain provisions to authenticate the conferment of agency.

EJCDC C-510 Notice of Award

Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.

Page 1 of 1

Notice of Award

Date: __________________

Project:

Owner: Owner's Contract No.:

Contract: Engineer's Project No.:

Bidder:

Bidder's Address:

You are notified that your Bid dated for the above Contract has been considered. You are the

Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for

[Indicate total Work, alternates, or sections of Work awarded.]

The Contract Price of your Contract is Dollars ($ ).

copies of the proposed Agreement, bond forms, and affidavit form accompany this Notice of Award.

sets of the Drawings and Contract Documents will be provided at the preconstruction conference.

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within [15] days of the date you receive this

Notice of Award.

1. Deliver to the Owner [ ] fully executed counterparts of the Agreement.

2. Deliver with the executed Agreement the affidavit and the Contract security [Bonds] as specified in

the Instructions to Bidders (Article 20), General Conditions (Paragraph 5.01), and Supplementary

Conditions (Paragraph SC-5.01).

3. Other conditions precedent:

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in

default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.

Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed

counterpart of the Contract Documents.

Owner

By:

Authorized Signature

Title Copy to Engineer

EJCDC C-520 Suggested Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price)


SUGGESTED FORM OF AGREEMENT

BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)

Prepared by


and



______________________


______________________


_______________________




Endorsed by




This Suggested Form of Agreement has been prepared for use with the Standard General Conditions

of the Construction Contract (EJCDC C-700, 2007 Edition). Their provisions are interrelated, and a

change in one may necessitate a change in the other. The language contained in the Suggested

Instructions to Bidders (EJCDC C-200, 2007 Edition) is also carefully interrelated with the language

of this Agreement. Their usage is discussed in the Narrative Guide to the 2007 EJCDC Construction

Documents (EJCDC C-001, 2007 Edition).



(703) 684-2882

www.nspe.org



(202) 347-7474

www.acec.org



(800) 548-2723

www.asce.org



(703) 548-3118

www.agc.org






http://www.agc.org/



Page 1 of 8

SUGGESTED FORM OF AGREEMENT

BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)

THIS AGREEMENT is by and between

Waterworks District 14 of Ward 5,

Parish of Calcasieu (“Owner”) and

(“Contractor”).

Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 – WORK

1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The

Work is generally described as follows: Office Building

ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT

2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is

generally described as follows:

Project Name: Office Building

Engineer’s Project No.: H1-18091-DA

Funding Agency Project No.:

ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER

3.01 The Project has been designed by Meyer & Associates, Inc. (Engineer), which is to act as

Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority

assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work

in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3.02 Engineer’s contact information is as follows:

Meyer & Associates, Inc. Contact Person: Mark McCarty

600 Cities Service Hwy. (337) 625-8353 phone

Sulphur, LA 70663 (337) 625-8453 fax

ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT TIMES

4.01 Time of the Essence

A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for

final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.



Page 2 of 8

4.02 Days to Achieve Substantial Completion and Final Payment

A. The Work will be substantially completed within 210 days after the date when the Contract

Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and

completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General

Conditions within 255 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.

4.03 Liquidated Damages

A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above

and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified

in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of

the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved

in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is

not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor

agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay Owner

$250.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 above for

Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion,

if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract

Time or any proper extension thereof granted by Owner, Contractor shall pay Owner $250.00

for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 above for completion and

readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.

ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE

5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to

Paragraphs 5.01.A, 5.01.B, and 5.01.C below:

A. For all Work other than Unit Price Work, a lump sum of: $

All specific cash allowances are included in the above price in accordance with Paragraph 11.02

of the General Conditions.

B. For all Unit Price Work, an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each

separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the actual quantity of that item:

UNIT PRICE WORK

Item

No. Description Unit

Estimated

Quantity

Bid Unit

Price Bid Price

Total of all Bid Prices (Unit Price Work) $



Page 3 of 8

The Bid prices for Unit Price Work set forth as of the Effective Date of the Agreement are

based on estimated quantities. As provided in Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions,

estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and

classifications are to be made by Engineer as provided in Paragraph 9.07 of the General

Conditions.

C. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit.

ARTICLE 6 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES

6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments

A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General

Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General

Conditions.

6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage

A. Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of

Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the day of each month during

performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below. All such payments will be

measured by the schedule of values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A of the General

Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in

the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements.

1. Prior to final completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract Documents,

progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but,

in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as

Engineer may determine or Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated

damages, in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions. Retainage

indicated below does not include withholdings for known incomplete work. Such

withholdings are not included in calculating the retainage but are additional monies

withheld.

a. For Contract Prices less than $500,000, 90% of Work completed and/or cost of

materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance of 10% being

retainage).

b. For Contract Prices of $500,000 or more, 95% of Work completed and/or cost of

materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance of 5% being

retainage).

B. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments

to Contractor to the applicable percent based on the preceding Paragraph 6.02.A.1 of the Work

completed, less such amounts as Engineer shall determine in accordance with Paragraph

14.02.B.5 of the General Conditions and less the value of Engineer’s estimate of the Work to be



Page 4 of 8

completed or corrected as shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected

attached to the certificate of Substantial Completion.

6.03 Final Payment

A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the

General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by

Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 14.07.

ARTICLE 7 – INTEREST

7.01 All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall bear

interest at the maximum legal rate at the place of the Project.

ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS

8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, Contractor makes the following

representations:

A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related

data identified in the Bidding Documents.

B. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local,

and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and

Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface

conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to

existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities), if any, that

have been identified in Paragraph SC-4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions as containing

reliable "technical data," and (2) reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions,

if any, at the Site that have been identified in Paragraph SC-4.06 of the Supplementary

Conditions as containing reliable "technical data."

E. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor; information commonly known

to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained

from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings

identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the effect of such information,

observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the

means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by

Contractor, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of

construction expressly required by the Contract Documents; and (3) Contractor’s safety

precautions and programs.



Page 5 of 8

F. Based on the information and observations referred to in Paragraph 8.01.E above, Contractor

does not consider that further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data

are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times,

and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the

Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.

H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or

discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written

resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.

I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all

terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.

ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

9.01 Contents

A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:

1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 8, inclusive).

2. Performance bond (pages 1 to 3, inclusive).

3. Payment bond (pages 1 to 3, inclusive).

4. General Conditions (pages 1 to 62, inclusive).

5. Supplementary Conditions (pages 1 to 12, inclusive).

6. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual.

7. Drawings consisting of 28 sheets with each sheet bearing the following general title: Office

Building.

8. Addenda (numbers to , inclusive).

9. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):

a. Contractor’s Bid (pages to , inclusive).

b. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award:

1) Attestations Affidavit

2) Affidavit Attesting that Public Contract was not Secured through Employment or

Payment of Solicitor



Page 6 of 8

10. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the

Agreement and are not attached hereto:

a. Notice to Proceed (pages to , inclusive).

b. Work Change Directives.

c. Change Orders.

B. The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly

noted otherwise above).

C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.

D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in

Paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 10 – MISCELLANEOUS

10.01 Terms

A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the

Supplementary Conditions.

10.02 Assignment of Contract

A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding

on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and,

specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may

not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may

be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an

assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility

under the Contract Documents.

10.03 Successors and Assigns

A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal

representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal

representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the

Contract Documents.

10.04 Severability

A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any

Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be

valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be

reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable

provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.



Page 7 of 8

10.05 Contractor’s Certifications

A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive

practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph

10.05:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value

likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract

execution;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence

the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to

establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner

of the benefits of free and open competition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or

without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial,

non-competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or

their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution

of the Contract.



Page 8 of 8

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement. Counterparts have been

delivered to Owner and Contractor. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or have been

identified by Owner and Contractor or on their behalf.

This Agreement will be effective on (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement).

OWNER: CONTRACTOR

By: By:

Title: Title:

(If Contractor is a corporation, a partnership,

or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority

to sign.)

Attest: Attest:

Title: Title:

Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

Telephone ( ) Telephone ( )

License No.:

(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence

of authority to sign. If Owner is a public body,

attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution

or other documents authorizing execution

of this Agreement.)

(Where applicable)

Agent for service of process:

EJCDC C-610 – Performance Bond

Published December 2010 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 3

PERFORMANCE BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address):

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address):

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Effective Date of the Agreement:

Amount:

Description (name and location):

BOND

Bond Number:

Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):

Amount:

Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 16

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause

this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal)

Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)


Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to

Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.



Page 2 of 3

1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind

themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and

assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract,

which is incorporated herein by reference.

2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety

and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except

when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in

Paragraph 3.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the

Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

3.1 The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and

the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor

Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is

requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety

to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not

request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business

days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a

conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner

shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference

requested under this Paragraph 3.1 shall be held within ten (10)

business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the

Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall

be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction

Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s

right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;

3.2 The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates

the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and

3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the

Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction

Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the

Construction Contract.

4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice

requirement in Paragraph 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply

with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the

Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety

demonstrates actual prejudice.

5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the

Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the

following actions:

5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the

Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;

5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction

Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified

contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for

performance and completion of the Construction Contract,

arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner

and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence, to be

secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a

qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the

Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of

damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of

the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the

Contractor Default; or

5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for

completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable

promptness under the circumstances:

5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for

which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as

practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to

the Owner; or

5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the

Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with

reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on

this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from

the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its

obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce

any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided

in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has

denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner

shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then

the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than

those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the

responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than

those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the

commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price,

the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:

7.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of

defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs

resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the

actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and

7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are

specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by

delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the

Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for

obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction

Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or

set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of

action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the

Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.

10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including

changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related

subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be

instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in

which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted

within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within



Page 3 of 3

two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years

after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this

Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are

void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations

available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be

applicable.

12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed

or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature

appears.

13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or

other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to

be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said

statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and

provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement

shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is

that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a

common law bond.

14. Definitions

14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable

by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract

after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance

for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by

the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages

to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and

proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the

Construction Contract.

14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the

Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all

Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the

Contract Documents.

14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has

not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply

with a material term of the Construction Contract.

14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not

been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under

the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply

with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

14.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise

the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and

subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be

Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

EJCDC C-615, Payment Bond


Page 1 of 3

PAYMENT BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address):

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address):


Effective Date of the Agreement:

Amount:

Description (name and location):

BOND

Bond Number:

Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):

Amount:

Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 18

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause

this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal)

Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)


Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference

to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.



Page 2 of 3

1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind

themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor,

materials, and equipment furnished for use in the

performance of the Construction Contract, which is

incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following

terms.

2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due

to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless

the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any

person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or

equipment furnished for use in the performance of the

Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor

shall have no obligation under this Bond.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction

Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this

Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the

Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in

Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the

Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity

seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment

furnished for use in the performance of the Construction

Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands,

liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph

3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense

defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a

duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.

5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond

shall arise after the following:

5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with

the Contractor,

5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non-

payment to the Contractor, stating with

substantial accuracy the amount claimed

and the name of the party to whom the

materials were, or equipment was,

furnished or supplied or for whom the

labor was done or performed, within ninety

(90) days after having last performed labor

or last furnished materials or equipment

included in the Claim; and

5.1.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the

address described in Paragraph 13).

5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct

contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to

the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph

13).

6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is

given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to

satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of

non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.

7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph

5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall

promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following

actions:

7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the

Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the

Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and

the basis for challenging any amounts that are

disputed; and

7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed

amounts.

7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations

under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 shall not be deemed to

constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or

Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim,

except as to undisputed amounts for which the

Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If,

however, the Surety fails to discharge its

obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety

shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable

attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to

recover any sums found to be due and owing to the

Claimant.

8. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of

this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees

provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond

shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by

the Surety.

9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the

Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of

the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any,

under any construction performance bond. By the

Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond,

they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the

performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to

satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this

Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for

the completion of the work.

10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or

others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to

the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable

for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant

under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no

obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of

Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants

under this Bond.

11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including

changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related

subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under

this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in

the state in which the project that is the subject of the

Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of

one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a

Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or



Page 3 of 3

(2) on which the last labor or service was performed by

anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished

by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of

(1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph

are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of

limitation available to sureties as a defense in the

jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the

Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address

shown on the page on which their signature appears.

Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished,

shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a

statutory or other legal requirement in the location where

the construction was to be performed, any provision in this

Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement

shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions

conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement

shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished,

the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory

bond and not as a common law bond.

15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a

potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and

Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall

permit a copy to be made.

16. Definitions

16.1 Claim: A written statement by the Claimant

including at a minimum:

1. The name of the Claimant;

2. The name of the person for whom the labor

was done, or materials or equipment furnished;

3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order

pursuant to which labor, materials, or

equipment was furnished for use in the

performance of the Construction Contract;

4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or

equipment furnished;

5. The date on which the Claimant last performed

labor or last furnished materials or equipment

for use in the performance of the Construction

Contract;

6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for

labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of

the date of the Claim;

7. The total amount of previous payments

received by the Claimant; and

8. The total amount due and unpaid to the

Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment

furnished as of the date of the Claim.

16.2 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct

contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor

of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or

equipment for use in the performance of the

Construction Contract. The term Claimant also

includes any individual or entity that has rightfully

asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s

lien or similar statute against the real property upon

which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond

shall be to include without limitation in the terms of

“labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the

water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline,

telephone service, or rental equipment used in the

Construction Contract, architectural and

engineering services required for performance of

the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s

subcontractors, and all other items for which a

mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction

where the labor, materials, or equipment were

furnished.

16.3 Construction Contract: The agreement between

the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover

page, including all Contract Documents and all

changes made to the agreement and the Contract

Documents.

16.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has

not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor

as required under the Construction Contract or to

perform and complete or comply with the other

material terms of the Construction Contract.

16.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that

comprise the agreement between the Owner and

Contractor.

17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a

contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this

Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term

Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

EJCDC C-550 Notice to Proceed


Page 1 of 1

Notice to Proceed

Date: _________________

Project:



Contractor:

Contractor's Address: [send Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested]

You are notified that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run

on . On or before that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the Contract

Documents. In accordance with Article 4 of the Agreement, the date of Substantial Completion

is , and the date of readiness for final payment is [(or) the number of days to achieve

Substantial Completion is , and the number of days to achieve readiness for final payment is

].

Before you may start any Work at the Site, Paragraph 2.01.B of the General Conditions

provides that you and Owner must each deliver to the other (with copies to Engineer and other

identified additional insureds and loss payees) certificates of insurance which each is required to

purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Also, before you may start any Work at the Site, you must:

__________________________________ [add other requirements].

Owner

Given by:

Authorized Signature

Title

Date

Copy to Engineer

EJCDC C-940 Work Change Directive


Page 1 of 1

Work Change Directive

No.

Date of Issuance: Effective Date:

Project:

Owner:

Owner's Contract No.:

Contract:

Date of Contract:

Contractor:

Engineer's Project No.:

Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s):

Item No. Description

Attachments (list documents supporting change):

Purpose for Work Change Directive:

Authorization for Work described herein to proceed on the basis of Cost of the Work due to:

Nonagreement on pricing of proposed change.

Necessity to expedite Work described herein prior to agreeing to changes on Contract

Price and Contract Time.

Estimated change in Contract Price and Contract Times:

Contract Price $ (increase/decrease) Contract Time (increase/decrease)

days

Recommended for Approval by Engineer: Date

Authorized for Owner by: Date

Received for Contractor by: Date

Received by Funding Agency (if applicable): Date:

EJCDC C-941 Change Order


Page 1 of 2

Change Order

No.


Project:

Owner:


Contract:

Date of Contract:

Contractor:


The Contract Documents are modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:

Description:

Attachments (list documents supporting change):

CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE: CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES:

Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times: Working days Calendar days

Substantial completion (days or date):

$ Ready for final payment (days or date):

[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved

Change Orders No. to No. : [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders

No. to No. :

Substantial completion (days):

$ Ready for final payment (days):

Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order:



[Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order:



Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders:


$ Ready for final payment (days or date): RECOMMENDED: ACCEPTED: ACCEPTED:

By: By: By: Engineer (Authorized Signature) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature)

Date: Date: Date:

Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable):

____________________________________________________________

Date:

EJCDC C-942 Field Order


Page 1 of 1

Field Order

No.


Project:

Owner:


Contract:

Date of Contract:

Contractor:


Attention:

You are hereby directed to promptly execute this Field Order issued in accordance with General

Conditions Paragraph 9.04.A, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price

or Contract Times. If you consider that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is

required, please notify the Engineer immediately and before proceeding with this Work.

Reference:

(Specification Section(s)) (Drawing(s) / Detail(s))

Description:

Attachments:

Engineer:

Receipt Acknowledged by Contractor: Date:

Copy to Owner

EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion


Page 1 of 2

Certificate of Substantial Completion

Project:



This [tentative] [definitive] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:

All Work under the Contract Documents: The following specified portions of the Work:

Date of Substantial Completion

The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner,

Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion

of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby declared and is also the date of

commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below.

A [tentative] [definitive] list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not

be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the

Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance,

heat, utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as provided in the Contract Documents except as

amended as follows:

Amended Responsibilities Not Amended

Owner's Amended Responsibilities:

Contractor's Amended Responsibilities:

EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion


Page 2 of 2

The following documents are attached to and made part of this Certificate:

This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract

Documents nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

Executed by Engineer Date

Accepted by Contractor Date

Accepted by Owner Date

NOTICE BY OWNER OF ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

STATE OF LOUISIANA

PARISH OF

TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:

Public notice is hereby given, according to law, that ., has

substantially performed everything that was required of to be done under that

certain contract entered into between the undersigned Owner and said Contractor dated

, in the amount of $ which contract was recorded in Mortgage Book bearing

File No. , of the Records of Mortgages for Parish, to note this acceptance

thereof in the margin of the above recited inscription of said contact.

, Louisiana, this day of , 20 .

OWNER

BY: Notice of Acceptance Form.doc

M:\wpd\forms.ca\Pay Recommendation form.wpd

RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT

NO._________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ENGINEER’S Project No. ________________________________

PROJECT: ____________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR ________________________________________________________________

Contract For _________________________________ Contract Date __________________

Estimate Desc. _______________________________ Estimate Amount ________________

For Period Ending _____________________________ LINE ITEM: ___________________

Eligible N/A Ineligible

N/A ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TO OWNER: ___________________________________________________________________

Attached hereto is the CONTRACTOR’s Estimate for Payment for Work accomplished under the

Contract through the date indicated above. The estimate meets the requirements of the Contract

Documents and includes the CONTRACTOR’s Certificate stating that all previous payments to him

under the Contract have been applied by him to discharge in full all of his obligations in connection with

the Work covered by all prior Estimate for Payments.

In accordance with the Contract, the undersigned recommends payment to the CONTRACTOR

of the amount due as shown below.

MEYER & ASSOCIATES, INC., Engineer

Dated _____________________ 20___ By:______________________________________

Vernon F. Meyer, P.E., or Richard T. Meyer, P.E. ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STATEMENT OF WORK: PAYMENT PROCEDURE:

Original Contract Price $_______________ :_________________

Net Change Orders $_______________

Current Contract Price $_______________

Work To-Date $_______________ APPROVED BY:

Amount Retained $_______________

Subtotal $_______________ _____________________________

ADD: Stored Materials $_______________

Previous Payments

Recommended $________________

Amount Due This Payment $________________

Meyer & Associates, Inc.

Consulting Engineers

Project: Estimate No.:

Owner: From: To:

Contractor: Project No.:

Original Contract Amount: Adjusted Contract Amount: Approved Change Orders:

This Period Total to Date

Total Value of Work Completed:

$0.00

$0.00

Retainage: 10%

$0.00

$0.00

Materials On Hand:

$0.00

Deductions:

$0.00

$0.00

Net Earned to Date:

$0.00

$0.00

Less Amount Paid to Date:

Net Amount Due This Estimate:

$0.00

$0.00 The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (1) all previous progress payments received from OWNER on account of Work done under the Contract referred to above have been

applied to discharge in full all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with Work covered by all prior Applications for Payment inclusive; and (2) Title to all materials and

equipment incorporated in said Work or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all liens, claims,

security interests and encumbrances (except such as covered by Bond acceptable to OWNER). (3) Partial pay amounts and associated quantities, cash allowances and stated

allowance work are subject to reconciliation by Engineer in accordance with controlling provisions of the contract. (4) Approval of interim payment estimate does not in anyway

constitute approval of time (days) and schedule.

Certified Correct

Contractor

Recommended for Payment

Engineer

Approved for Payment

Owner

By: By: By:

Date: Date: Date:

Meyer and Associates, Inc.


2 of 3 M:\wpd\Forms\Meyer Pay Estimate Form.xlsx

Periodic Estimate No. for Period to

1. COST OF WORK COMPLETED TO DATE UNDER ORIGINAL CONTRACT ONLY

Entries must be limited to work and costs under the original contract only.

Columns (1) through (5). Enter data from Bid Form.

Columns (6) and (7). Show all work completed this period under original contract.

Columns (8) and (9). Show all work completed to date under original contract.

Contract Amount Completed This Period Completed To Date

Item No.

(1)

Description of Items

(2)

Quantity

(3)

Cost per

Unit

(4)

Total Cost

Per Unit

(5)

Quantity

or %

(6)

Total Cost

(7)

Quantity

or %

(8)

Total Cost

(9)

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

$0.00 $0.00 $0.00

TOTAL CONTRACT AMOUNT $0.00 $0.00 $0.00

Meyer and Associates, Inc.


3 of 3 M:\wpd\Forms\Meyer Pay Estimate Form.xlsx

Periodic Estimate No. for Period to

2. INSTRUCTIONS FOR MATERIAL INVENTORY

Entries must be limited to materials and costs under the original contract only.

Column (4): Cumulative total of previously received material. Column (5): Quantity received this month with corresponding invoices attached.

Column (6): Column 4 + 5. Column (7): Quantity used in previous work. Column (8): Quantity used in current month. Column (9): Column 7 + 8.

Column (10): Column 6 - 9. Column (11): Price of materials per invoices. Column (12): Column 10 x 11.

Item No.

(1)

Description of Items

(2)

Contract

Quantity

(3)

Received

Previous

(4)

Received

Current

(5)

Total

Received

(6)

Total Used

Previous

(7)

Total Used

Current

(8)

Total Used

(9)

Current In-

Stock

(10)

Unit Price

(11)

Extensions

(12)

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

0 0 0 $0.00

SUBTOTAL $0.00

Sales Tax 9.00% $0.00

TOTAL $0.00

GENERAL CONDITIONS

EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract


This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its

use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated

Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Prepared by


and



______________________


______________________


_______________________




Endorsed by




These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between

Owner and Contractor (EJCDC C-520 or C-525, 2007 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a

change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the

Narrative Guide to the EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC C-001, 2007 Edition). For guidance in

the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions

(EJCDC C-800, 2007 Edition).



(703) 684-2882

www.nspe.org



(202) 347-7474

www.acec.org



(800) 548-2723

www.asce.org



(703) 548-3118

www.agc.org






http://www.agc.org/



Page i

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology .......................................................................................................... 1

1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 5

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ......................................................................................................................... 6

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ............................................................................. 6

2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 6

2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................... 6

2.04 Starting the Work .......................................................................................................................... 7

2.05 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7

2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................. 7

2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules .................................................................................................... 7

Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse ............................................................................ 8

3.01 Intent .............................................................................................................................................. 8

3.02 Reference Standards ...................................................................................................................... 8

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ....................................................................................... 9

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ................................................................... 9

3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 10

3.06 Electronic Data ............................................................................................................................ 10

Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental

Conditions; Reference Points ........................................................................................................... 11

4.01 Availability of Lands ................................................................................................................... 11

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ........................................................................................... 11

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................. 12

4.04 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 13

4.05 Reference Points .......................................................................................................................... 14

4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site .............................................................................. 14

Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance ...................................................................................................................... 16

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ................................................................................... 16

5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .................................................................................................... 16

5.03 Certificates of Insurance ............................................................................................................. 17

5.04 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 17

5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................ 19

5.06 Property Insurance ....................................................................................................................... 19

5.07 Waiver of Rights ......................................................................................................................... 20

5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds ......................................................................... 21



Page ii

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ........................................................... 21

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer .......................................................... 22

Article 6 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................................ 22

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence ............................................................................................... 22

6.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................ 22

6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 22

6.04 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 23

6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ....................................................................................................... 23

6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .................................................................... 25

6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 27

6.08 Permits ......................................................................................................................................... 27

6.09 Laws and Regulations ................................................................................................................. 28

6.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 28

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 28

6.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 29

6.13 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................. 29

6.14 Safety Representative .................................................................................................................. 30

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs.............................................................................................. 30

6.16 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 30

6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ...................................................................................................... 31

6.18 Continuing the Work ................................................................................................................... 32

6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee .......................................................................... 33

6.20 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 33

6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services ............................................................................... 34

Article 7 – Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................................... 35

7.01 Related Work at Site ................................................................................................................... 35

7.02 Coordination ................................................................................................................................ 35

7.03 Legal Relationships ..................................................................................................................... 36

Article 8 – Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 36

8.01 Communications to Contractor ................................................................................................... 36

8.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................ 36

8.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 36

8.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 36

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ................................................................................... 36

8.06 Insurance...................................................................................................................................... 36

8.07 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................. 37

8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .............................................................................................. 37

8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ................................................................................... 37

8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition .................................................................... 37

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .......................................................................................... 37

8.12 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................... 37

Article 9 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ......................................................................................... 37

9.01 Owner’s Representative .............................................................................................................. 37



Page iii

9.02 Visits to Site ................................................................................................................................ 37

9.03 Project Representative ................................................................................................................. 38

9.04 Authorized Variations in Work .................................................................................................. 38

9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ........................................................................................................... 38

9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .......................................................................... 39

9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work .......................................................................................... 39

9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ..................... 39

9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ........................................................ 39

9.10 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................... 40

Article 10 – Changes in the Work; Claims ..................................................................................................... 40

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................... 40

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................ 41

10.03 Execution of Change Orders ....................................................................................................... 41

10.04 Notification to Surety .................................................................................................................. 41

10.05 Claims .......................................................................................................................................... 41

Article 11 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ....................................................................... 42

11.01 Cost of the Work ......................................................................................................................... 42

11.02 Allowances .................................................................................................................................. 45

11.03 Unit Price Work .......................................................................................................................... 45

Article 12 – Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times ............................................................... 46

12.01 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................ 46

12.02 Change of Contract Times .......................................................................................................... 47

12.03 Delays .......................................................................................................................................... 47

Article 13 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....................... 48

13.01 Notice of Defects ......................................................................................................................... 48

13.02 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................... 48

13.03 Tests and Inspections .................................................................................................................. 49

13.04 Uncovering Work ........................................................................................................................ 49

13.05 Owner May Stop the Work ......................................................................................................... 50

13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ................................................................................ 50

13.07 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................ 50

13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ................................................................................................... 51

13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work ......................................................................................... 52

Article 14 – Payments to Contractor and Completion .................................................................................... 52

14.01 Schedule of Values ...................................................................................................................... 52

14.02 Progress Payments ...................................................................................................................... 52

14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title .................................................................................................... 55

14.04 Substantial Completion ............................................................................................................... 55

14.05 Partial Utilization ........................................................................................................................ 56

14.06 Final Inspection ........................................................................................................................... 57

14.07 Final Payment .............................................................................................................................. 57

14.08 Final Completion Delayed .......................................................................................................... 58



Page iv

14.09 Waiver of Claims ........................................................................................................................ 58

Article 15 – Suspension of Work and Termination ........................................................................................ 59

15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ......................................................................................................... 59

15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................... 59

15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ................................................................................... 60

15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate................................................................................... 60

Article 16 – Dispute Resolution ...................................................................................................................... 61

16.01 Methods and Procedures ............................................................................................................. 61

Article 17 – Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................. 61

17.01 Giving Notice .............................................................................................................................. 61

17.02 Computation of Times ................................................................................................................ 62

17.03 Cumulative Remedies ................................................................................................................. 62

17.04 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................... 62

17.05 Controlling Law .......................................................................................................................... 62

17.06 Headings ...................................................................................................................................... 62



Page 1 of 62

ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial

capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to

both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial

capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs,

and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify,

correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.

2. Agreement—The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and

Contractor covering the Work.

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor

during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be

accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.

4. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is

releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United

States Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

5. Bid—The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the

prices for the Work to be performed.

6. Bidder—The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner.

7. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents

(including all Addenda).

8. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid

security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.

9. Change Order—A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and

Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the

Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.

10. Claim—A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract

Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A

demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.

11. Contract—The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor

concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or

agreements, whether written or oral.



Page 2 of 62

12. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard

copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop

Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and

physical conditions are not Contract Documents.

13. Contract Price—The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the

provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work).

14. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve

Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it

is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final

payment.

15. Contractor—The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.

16. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 11.01 for definition.

17. Drawings—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which

graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by

Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined.

18. Effective Date of the Agreement—The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes

effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed

and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.

19. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.

20. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work

but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.

21. General Requirements—Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs,

Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances

that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto.

23. Hazardous Waste—The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section

1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time.

24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations,

ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and

courts having jurisdiction.

25. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or

personal property.

26. Milestone—A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate

completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.



Page 3 of 62

27. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon

timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein,

Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement.

28. Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which

the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the

Work under the Contract Documents.

29. Owner—The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and

for whom the Work is to be performed.

30. PCBs—Polychlorinated biphenyls.

31. Petroleum—Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard

conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square

inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and

oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils.

32. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the

sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the

Work within the Contract Times.

33. Project—The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract

Documents may be the whole, or a part.

34. Project Manual—The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing

the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or

more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents.

35. Radioactive Material—Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the

Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time.

36. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer who may be

assigned to the Site or any part thereof.

37. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative

of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the

Work will be judged.

38. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required

submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related

construction activities.

39. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions

of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing

Contractor’s Applications for Payment.



Page 4 of 62

40. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or

information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted

by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

41. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon

which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto,

and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.

42. Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for

materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and

certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto.

43. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any

other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.

44. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has

progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part

thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the

Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.

The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of

the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.

45. Successful Bidder—The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an

award.

46. Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which amends or

supplements these General Conditions.

47. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a

direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to

be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor.

48. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,

manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements

containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid

petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater,

storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

49. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.

50. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to

be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or

providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and

furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction,

all as required by the Contract Documents.

51. Work Change Directive—A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective

Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an



Page 5 of 62

addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen

subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to

emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract

Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a

Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order

following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract

Times.

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when used in

the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as

directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment

by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,”

“satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or

determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional

judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for

compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of

the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless

there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is

not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to

supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake

responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the

Contract Documents.

C. Day:

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next

midnight.

D. Defective:

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is

unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or

b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or

approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless

responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial

Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).



Page 6 of 62

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall

mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other

specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall

mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete

and ready for intended use.

3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or

equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete

and ready for intended use.

4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide” is not used in connection with services,

materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide”

is implied.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known

technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in

accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall

also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each

deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary

Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any

additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are

required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project

Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.

2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the

Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A

Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the

Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after

the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever

date is earlier.



Page 7 of 62

2.04 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to

run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence

to run.

2.05 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless

otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely

review:

1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting

and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the

Contract Documents;

2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and

3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of

items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into

component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during

performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and

profit applicable to each item of Work.

2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer,

and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as

to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling

Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining

required records.

B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to

act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the

Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information,

render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.

2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by

Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to

Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A.

Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete

and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable

schedules are submitted to Engineer.

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of

the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on



Page 8 of 62

Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of

the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility

therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable

arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it

provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work.

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required

by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part

thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor,

documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the

Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the

indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to

Owner.

C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as

provided in Article 9.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations

1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society,

organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or

by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations

in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there

were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a

Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or

Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set

forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign

to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,

consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of

the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions

of the Contract Documents.



Page 9 of 62

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies:

1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each

part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and

check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor

shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy

which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written

interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected

thereby.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the

performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy

within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable

Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of

any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall

not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph

6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by

one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error,

ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual

knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies:

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of

the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or

discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any

Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract

Documents); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work

(unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in

violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in

the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work

Change Directive.

B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and

deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways:



Page 10 of 62

1. A Field Order;

2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph

6.17.D.3); or

3. Engineer’s written interpretation or clarification.

3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or

other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its

consultants, including electronic media editions; or

2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of

the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific

written verification or adaptation by Engineer.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the

Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract

Documents for record purposes.

3.06 Electronic Data

A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or

Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are

limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text,

data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any

conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole

risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies

govern.

B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or

otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees

that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party

shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day

acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party.

C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no

representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting

from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing

from those used by the data’s creator.



Page 11 of 62

ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;

HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS

4.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions

not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must

comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for

permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are

unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the

Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner’s furnishing the Site

or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of

record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and

Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction

lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for

temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

contiguous to the Site; and

2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the

accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and

drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary

Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or

make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not

limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of

construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident

thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or

indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such

other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.



Page 12 of 62

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or

revealed either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to

rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and

generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract

Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the

subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an

emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such

condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection

therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will

promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional

exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor)

of Engineer’s findings and conclusions.

C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent

that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or

decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject,

however, to the following:

a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph

4.03.A; and

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract

Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final

commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the

submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or

b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a

result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and



Page 13 of 62

contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be

conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such final commitment; or

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if

any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be

made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or any

of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or

subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other

professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by

Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

4.04 Underground Facilities

A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents

with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on

information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground

Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the

Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such

information or data provided by others; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall

have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all such information and data;

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;

c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including

Owner, during construction; and

d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage

thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Not Shown or Indicated:

1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was

not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract

Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further

disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith

(except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such

Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer.

Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to

which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the



Page 14 of 62

consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time,

Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.

2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change

Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An

equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the

extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that

was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the

Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been

expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree

on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price

or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph

10.05.

4.05 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in

Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor

shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference

points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior

written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or

property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in

grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such

reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings

known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the

Site.

B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the

accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and

drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary

Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or

make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not

limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of

construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident

thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or

indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such

other data, interpretations, opinions or information.



Page 15 of 62

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or

revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified

in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible

for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by

Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible.

D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for

whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall

immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with

such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph

6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in

writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to

retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly

after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to

timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph

4.06.E.

E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any

affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered

written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has

been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under

which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement

to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or

both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to

be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph

10.05.

F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a

reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special

conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such

condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to

or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a

result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as

provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by

Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 7.

G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold

harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and

against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of

engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other

dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition,

provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the

Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the

scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is

responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual

or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.



Page 16 of 62

H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold

harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,

consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,

and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys,

and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of

or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for

whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to

indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or

entity’s own negligence.

I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental

Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.

ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the

Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s

obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after

the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified

in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or

by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the

Contract Documents.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided

otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list

of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as

Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial

Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed

by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s

authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date

the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond.

C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its

right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases

to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and

Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another

bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and

5.02.

5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers

A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by

Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed

or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance

policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also



Page 17 of 62

meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary

Conditions.

5.03 Certificates of Insurance

A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee

identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of

insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to

purchase and maintain.

B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee

identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of

insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to

purchase and maintain.

C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance

with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from

the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation to maintain

such insurance.

D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract

necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor.

E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on

Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents.

5.04 Contractor’s Insurance

A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being

performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or

result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the

Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier,

or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by

anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit

acts;

2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of

Contractor’s employees;

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other

than Contractor’s employees;

4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which

are sustained:



Page 18 of 62

a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of

such person by Contractor, or

b. by any other person for any other reason;

5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of

tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage

arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.

B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall:

1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be

written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary

exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or

entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional

insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional

insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary

coverage for all claims covered thereby;

2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability

provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is

greater;

3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations under

Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20;

4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially

changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner

and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary

Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of

insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide);

5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may

be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07;

and

6. include completed operations coverage:

a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment.

b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the

Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence

satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at

final payment and one year thereafter.



Page 19 of 62

5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner,

at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability

insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the

Contract Documents.

5.06 Property Insurance

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain

property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof

(subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or

required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other

individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of

them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss

payee;

2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for

physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and

equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss:

fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake,

collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations,

water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may

be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but

not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);

4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in

writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and

equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer;

5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner;

6. include testing and startup; and

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by

Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to

whom a certificate of insurance has been issued.

B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property

insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which

will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other

individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors,



Page 20 of 62

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them,

each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee.

C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be

purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or

endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal

refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to

each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver

provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07.

D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified

in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work

to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The

risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors,

or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within

the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense.

E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance

policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and

the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to

commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not

such other insurance has been procured by Owner.

5.07 Waiver of Rights

A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will

protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities

identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such

policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or

causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the

event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of

the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other

and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and

subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or

resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property

insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors

and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as

loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and

subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused.

None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have

to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so

issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers,

directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any

of them for:



Page 21 of 62

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond

direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or

resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting

from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained

on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to

Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final

payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss

referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment

of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery

against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them.

5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with

Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear,

subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner

shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance

with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached,

the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account

thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order.

B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of

the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to

Owner’s exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make

settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may

reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall

adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest,

Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties.

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace

A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of

the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance

with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party

shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other

evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to

the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may

reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance

required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in

writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain

prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the

other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party’s



Page 22 of 62

interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change

Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly.

5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer

A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial

Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall

commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have

acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated

thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the

policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on

account of any such partial use or occupancy.

ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

6.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting

such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the

Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the

means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be

responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific

means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in

and expressly required by the Contract Documents.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident

superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except

under extraordinary circumstances.

6.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work

and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times

maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the

Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at

the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the

performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written

consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer.

6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full

responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment

and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,

temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing,

start-up, and completion of the Work.



Page 23 of 62

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified,

shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All

special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit

of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including

reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected,

used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except

as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.

6.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07

as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07)

proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract

Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements

applicable thereto.

2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be

submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times

may only be made by a Change Order.

6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents

by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or

description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless

the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent,

or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or

material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the

circumstances described below.

1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed

by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in

related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an “or-equal” item, in

which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be

accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of

proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of

material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance,

strength, and design characteristics;



Page 24 of 62

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results

imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and

3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service.

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and

2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the

Contract Documents.

2. Substitute Items:

a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor

does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a

proposed substitute item.

b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to

determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that

named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute

items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than

Contractor.

c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as

supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate

under the circumstances.

d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute

item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:

1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:

a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general

design,

b) be similar in substance to that specified, and

c) be suited to the same use as that specified;

2) will state:

a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice

Contractor’s achievement of Substantial Completion on time,

b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in

any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract

with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed

substitute item, and



Page 25 of 62

c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with

the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;

3) will identify:

a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and

b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and

4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or

indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of

other contractors affected by any resulting change.

B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique,

sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents,

Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure

of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow

Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to

that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer

will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate

each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require

Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole

judge of acceptability. No “or equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until

Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a

substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will advise Contractor in

writing of any negative determination.

D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special

performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute

proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not

Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall

reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed

substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for

making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with

Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or

“or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.

6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including

those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a

replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be



Page 26 of 62

required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or

perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.

B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other

individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a

specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list

thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance (either in writing

or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in

the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other

individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due

investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor,

Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in

the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No

acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether

initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject

defective Work.

C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the

Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the

Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity

any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor,

Supplier or other individual or entity; nor

2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of

any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may

otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the

Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor.

E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities

performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor.

F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not

control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the

Work to be performed by any specific trade.

G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an

appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically

binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract

Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a

Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in

Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will

contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner,



Page 27 of 62

Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary

Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and

damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss

covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers

on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier,

Contractor will obtain the same.

6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the

performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,

product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular

invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in

the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is

subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to

others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold

harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,

consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including

but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals,

and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any

infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or

resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device

specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license

fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.

C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold


consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,



or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the

performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention,

design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.

6.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for

all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining

such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees

necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or,

if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility

owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work.



Page 28 of 62

6.09 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations

applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by

applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for

monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or

Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not

limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all

court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work.

However, it shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and

Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of

Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective

Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance

of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner

and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any

such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

6.10 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by

Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are

applicable during the performance of the Work.

6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and

the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and

shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or

other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to

any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas

resulting from the performance of the Work.

2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the

Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise

resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.

3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold

harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees,

agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,

costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,

architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute

resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought



Page 29 of 62

by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified

hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor’s performance of the Work.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work

Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials,

rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other

debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the

Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall

remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus

materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the

Contract Documents.

D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in

any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or

adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.

6.12 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings,

Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written

interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during

construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of

all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the

Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for

Owner.

6.13 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety

precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve

Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of

their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall

take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to

prevent damage, injury or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;

2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or

off the Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,

pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for

removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of

persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and



Page 30 of 62

shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall

notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when

prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,

removal, relocation, and replacement of their property.

C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any.

The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the

Work.

D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety

program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while

at the Site.

E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused,

directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other

individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or

anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except

damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions

of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them

may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or

negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or

indirectly employed by any of them).

F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue

until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and

Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as

otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).

6.14 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose

duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and

supervising of safety precautions and programs.

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or

other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between

or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.

6.16 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or

adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss.

Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant

changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are

required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is



Page 31 of 62

required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work

Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.

6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples

A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in

accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each

submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities,

dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show

Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to

enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph

6.17.D.

2. Samples:

a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications.

b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog

numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable

Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of

Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent

submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.

C. Submittal Procedures:

1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:

a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and

Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified

performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers,

and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the

indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation

pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for

means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety

precautions and programs incident thereto.



Page 32 of 62

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied

Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review

and approval of that submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations

that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract

Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop

Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop

Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.

D. Engineer’s Review:

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the

Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only

to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in

the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible

with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the

Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or

procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or

procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents)

or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate

item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any

variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied

with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each

such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop

Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from

responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.

E. Resubmittal Procedures:

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number

of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and

approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the

corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.

6.18 Continuing the Work

A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or

disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any

disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor

may otherwise agree in writing.



Page 33 of 62

6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the

Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on

representation of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor,

Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is

responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is

not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform

the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related

thereto by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice

of acceptability by Engineer;

6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

7. any correction of defective Work by Owner.

6.20 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold


consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,



or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is

attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible

property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the

extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or

any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the

Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable .



Page 34 of 62

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or

personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any

individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or

anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph

6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,

compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or

other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other

employee benefit acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the

liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,

consultants and subcontractors arising out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions,

reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the

injury or damage.

6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are

specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services

are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods,

techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional

services in violation of applicable law.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,

materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner

and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed

professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications,

certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop

Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if

prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of

the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner

and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services

must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and

design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with

performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract

Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except

design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph

6.17.D.1.



Page 35 of 62

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria

required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

7.01 Related Work at Site

A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or

through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such

other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then:

1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and

2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if

any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a

result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility

owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe

access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials

and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with

theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to

properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with

such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or

otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work

with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and

responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and

other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor

in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors.

C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed

by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to

Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it

unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s

failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for

integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work.

7.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the

Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions:

1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the

activities among the various contractors will be identified;

2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided.



Page 36 of 62

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and

responsibility for such coordination.

7.03 Legal Relationships

A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner.

B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other

contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs

incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor’s wrongful actions or inactions.

C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for

the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of

Contractor’s wrongful action or inactions.

ARTICLE 8 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

8.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications

to Contractor through Engineer.

8.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom

Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be

that of the former Engineer.

8.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

8.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C

and 14.07.C.

8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests

A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys

to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to

Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and

tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site.

8.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property

insurance are set forth in Article 5.



Page 37 of 62

8.07 Change Orders

A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.

8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in

Paragraph 13.03.B.

8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,

Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety

precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws

and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for

Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set

forth in Paragraph 4.06.

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial

arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents.

8.12 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific

applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed

pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.

ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

9.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and

responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during

construction are set forth in the Contract Documents.

9.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction

as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design

professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of

Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations,

Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in

accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or



Page 38 of 62

continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts

will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed

Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and

observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor

to guard Owner against defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and

responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result

of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct,

control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques,

sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,

or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the

performance of the Work.

9.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist

Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities

of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the

Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in

Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the

Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and

limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary

Conditions.

9.04 Authorized Variations in Work

A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract

Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and

are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as

indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be

binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If

Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or

Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or

extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in

Paragraph 10.05.

9.05 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that

Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents

or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning

whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require

special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the

Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.



Page 39 of 62

9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and

Samples, see Paragraph 6.17.

B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and

design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see

Paragraph 6.21.

C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.

D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14.

9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by

Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on

such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application

for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except

as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner

and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge

of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between

Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of

the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the

performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the

event giving rise to the question.

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If

Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the

Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date

of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the

purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B.

C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and

Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.

D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show

partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or

decision rendered in good faith in such capacity.

9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of

the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not



Page 40 of 62

exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any

authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract,

tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other

individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.

B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for

Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety

precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws

and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for

Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor,

any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all

maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection,

tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will

only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the

case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate

compliance with, the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply

to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any.

9.10 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific

applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer has been informed

pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.

ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS

10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or

from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a

Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed

with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract

Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).

B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any,

of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a

result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph

10.05.



Page 41 of 62

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the

Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract

Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the

case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as

provided in Paragraph 13.04.D.

10.03 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer

covering:

1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii)

required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner’s

correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;

2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including

any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a

Work Change Directive; and

3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written

decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of

executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in

accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and

Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the

Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A.

10.04 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the

general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not

limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s

responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any

such change.

10.05 Claims

A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09,

shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a

condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may

otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such

Claims.

B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant

to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after

the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with

the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data



Page 42 of 62

shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start

of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more

accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be

prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in

Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each

Claim shall be accompanied by claimant’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the

entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The

opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after

receipt of the claimant’s last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).

C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last

submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the

following actions in writing:

1. deny the Claim in whole or in part;

2. approve the Claim; or

3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole

discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further

resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial.

D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be

deemed denied.

E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or

10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor

invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or

denial.

F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in

accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.

ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

11.01 Cost of the Work

A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in

Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the

Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an

adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be

reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of

the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may

be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing

in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and

shall include only the following items:



Page 43 of 62

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the

Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such

employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel

employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the

Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall

include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall

include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’

compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay

applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on

Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by

Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs

of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection

therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with

Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to

Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and

equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be

obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If

required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable

to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with

the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that

the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the

Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as

Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing

laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related

to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of

Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,

machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not

owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost,

less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of

Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented

from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with

the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,

dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of



Page 44 of 62

said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease

when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which

Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or

anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may

be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not

compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the

performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of

property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such

losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor,

any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose

acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the

written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be

included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the

Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the

Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract

Documents to purchase and maintain.

B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of

partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers,

architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents,

expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the

Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and

not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in

Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be

considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the

Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital

employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly

employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not



Page 45 of 62

limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly

supplied, and making good any damage to property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically

and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A.

C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee

shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a

Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of

Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.

D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to

Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in

accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to

Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.

11.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the

Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by

such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

B. Cash Allowances:

1. Contractor agrees that:

a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of

materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all

applicable taxes; and

b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,

profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the

Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on

account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance:

1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover

unanticipated costs.

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer

to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the

Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

11.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,

initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to



Page 46 of 62

the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the

estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the

purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the

actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by

Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to

cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance

with Paragraph 10.05 if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and

significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of

having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in

Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or

decrease.

ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES

12.01 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the

Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the

Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph

10.05.

B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the

Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by

application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the

provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or

2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents,

by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not

necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents

and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the

Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for

overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).



Page 47 of 62

C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various

portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall

be 15 percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee

and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is

that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a

fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1

and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a

fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4,

11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results

in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a

deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease;

and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in

Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with

Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.

12.02 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in

the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to

the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph

10.05.

B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an

adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this

Article 12.

12.03 Delays

A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times

due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount

equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph

12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or



Page 48 of 62

neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as

contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God.

B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as

contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or

interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an

equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor’s

entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being

essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic,

abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the

control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor,

then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment

is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an

adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this

Paragraph 12.03.C.

D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants,

or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other

professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor

on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.

E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays

within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor

or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.

ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF

DEFECTIVE WORK

13.01 Notice of Defects

A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be

given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this

Article 13.

13.02 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,

independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will

have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and

testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them

of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.



Page 49 of 62

13.03 Tests and Inspections

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections,

tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required

inspections or tests.

B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all

inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except:

1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;

2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph

13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and

3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)

specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such

public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such

inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the

required certificates of inspection or approval.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection

with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of

materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs,

or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in

the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to

Owner and Engineer.

E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by

Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer,

uncover such Work for observation.

F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless

Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and

Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.

13.04 Uncovering Work

A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by

Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense.

B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or

inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or

otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that

portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment.



Page 50 of 62

C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses,



or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory

replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of

work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If

the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as

provided in Paragraph 10.05.

D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the

Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such

uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the

parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim

therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

13.05 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable

materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will

conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any

portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner

to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the

benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any

surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work

A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or

not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it

from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims,

costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,


resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited

to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07,

Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and

guarantee, if any, on said Work.

13.07 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may

be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract

Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be

defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use

by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to

be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s

written instructions:



Page 51 of 62

1. repair such defective land or areas; or

2. correct such defective Work; or

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it

with Work that is not defective, and

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work

of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an

emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the

defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All

claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,


resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and

replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will

be paid by Contractor.

C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service

before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run

from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or

removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to

such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal

and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.

E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or

warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a

waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and,

prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may

do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all

fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or

arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and

determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to

reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by

Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer’s

recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary

revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an

appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted.

If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as

provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate

amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner.



Page 52 of 62

13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective

Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with

Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents,

Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed

expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude

Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend

Contractor’s services related thereto, take possession of Contractor’s tools, appliances,

construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and

equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored

elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees,

Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable

Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph.

C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of


dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies

under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued

incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and

Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable

to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in

Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all

costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or

replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the

performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies

under this Paragraph 13.09.

ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION

14.01 Schedule of Values

A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for

progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to

Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units

completed.

14.02 Progress Payments

A. Applications for Payments:

1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but

not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an



Page 53 of 62

Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as

of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is

required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and

equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at

another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied

by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the

materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and

equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect

Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an

affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the

Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations

associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the

Agreement.

B. Review of Applications:

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in

writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the

Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend

payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the

Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will

constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the

executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s

review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the

best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:

a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject

to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial

Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a

final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph

9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have

been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have

represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been

performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or



Page 54 of 62

involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically

assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor

to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments

nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose

responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the

safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s

performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the

moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or

e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner

free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s

opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in

Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because

of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise

or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be

necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or

replacement;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with

Paragraph 13.09; or

d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in

Paragraph 15.02.A.

C. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s

recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph

14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.



Page 55 of 62

D. Reduction in Payment:

1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s performance or

furnishing of the Work;

b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has

delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of

such Liens;

c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or

d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in

Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A.

2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will

give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for

such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the

amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any

adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons

for such action.

3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the

amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph

14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by

any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no

later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens.

14.04 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify

Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items

specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of

Substantial Completion.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an

inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the

Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons

therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative

certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There

shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before



Page 56 of 62

final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which

to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If,

after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially

complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner,

notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner’s

objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14

days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial

Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such

changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any

objections from Owner.

D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will

deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities

pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety,

and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and

guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in

writing prior to Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer’s

aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment.

E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial

Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and

complete or correct items on the tentative list.

14.05 Partial Utilization

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially

completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or

which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part

of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference

with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:

1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any

such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially

complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete,

Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D

for that part of the Work.

2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers

any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request

Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall

make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer

does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify

Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part

of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with

respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of

responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.



Page 57 of 62

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance

with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance.

14.06 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is

complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will

notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is

incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to

complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.

14.07 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment:

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections

identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract

Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,

certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record

documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make

application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the

evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien

rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved

by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor

that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for

which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other

indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or

which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid

or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or

receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to

indemnify Owner against any Lien.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final

inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying



Page 58 of 62

documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work

has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have

been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for

Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of payment and present the

Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give

written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions

of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to

Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in

which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for

Payment.

C. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and

accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is

entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated

damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

14.08 Final Completion Delayed

A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if

Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment

(for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without

terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully

completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully

completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have

been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of

the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by

Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made

under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a

waiver of Claims.

14.09 Waiver of Claims

A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:

1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled

Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06,

from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees

specified therein, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents;

and

2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in

accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as

still unsettled.



Page 59 of 62

ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

15.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period

of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will

fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so

fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the

Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim

therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause:

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or

suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established

under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);

2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;

3. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or

4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving

Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of

Contractor:

1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s

tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the

full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or

conversion);

2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner

has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and

3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.

C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive

any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price

exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of


dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work,

such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such

unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and

damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when



Page 60 of 62

so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or

remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the

Work performed.

D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if

Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure

to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of

said notice.

E. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect

any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue.

Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from

liability.

F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of

Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of

Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C.

15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and

without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case,

Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior

to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and

profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and

furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in

connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on

such expenses;

3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of


dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors,

Suppliers, and others; and

4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other

economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive

days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on

any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days



Page 61 of 62

to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days

written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such

suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment

on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03.

B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer

has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has

failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven

days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such

amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are

not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an

adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly

attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph.

ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION

16.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a

decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation

will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration

Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall

be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the

Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E.

B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall

be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation

shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above.

C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial

pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after

termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor:

1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary

Conditions; or

2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or

3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of

competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS

17.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will

be deemed to have been validly given if:



Page 62 of 62

1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the

corporation for whom it is intended; or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business

address known to the giver of the notice.

17.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to

exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on

a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction,

such day will be omitted from the computation.

17.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies

available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way

as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise

imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other

provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if

repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,

obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.

17.04 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given

in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the

Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or

termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

17.05 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.

17.06 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of

these General Conditions.

EJCDC C-800 Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions



Prepared by


and



______________________


______________________


_______________________




Endorsed by






(703) 684-2882

www.nspe.org



(202) 347-7474

www.acec.org



(800) 548-2723

www.asce.org



(703) 548-3118

www.agc.org





Page i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

SC- 1.01 Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................. 1

SC- 2.02 Copies of Documents ...................................................................................................................... 1

SC- 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ................................................................. 1

SC- 4.01 Availability of Lands ....................................................................................................................... 1

SC- 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .............................................................................................. 2

SC- 4.04 Underground Facilities .................................................................................................................. 2

SC-4.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................... 2

SC- 5.03 Certificates of Insurance ................................................................................................................. 3

SC-5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................... 3

SC-5.06 Property Insurance ......................................................................................................................... 4

SC- 6.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................... 5

SC- 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ............................................................................................... 5

SC-6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ...................................................................... 5

SC-6.10 Taxes................................................................................................................................................ 6

SC-6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples .......................................................................................................... 7

SC- 6.20 Indemnification ............................................................................................................................... 7

SC-7.01 Related Work at Site ........................................................................................................................ 8

SC-7.04 Claims Between Contractors .......................................................................................................... 8

SC-9.03 Project Representative .................................................................................................................... 9

SC-11.01 Cost of the Work .............................................................................................................................. 9

SC-11.03 Unit Price Work ............................................................................................................................ 10

SC-12.01 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................. 10

SC-13.03 Tests and Inspections .................................................................................................................... 10

SC-14.02 Progress Payments ....................................................................................................................... 10

SC-14.04 Substantial Completion ................................................................................................................. 11

SC-14.07 Final Payment ............................................................................................................................... 11

SC-16.01 Methods and Procedure ................................................................................................................ 12

SC-17.01 Giving Notice ................................................................................................................................ 12

SC-17.07 Recovery of Attorney’s Fees ......................................................................................................... 12



Page ii

This page intentionally left blank



Page 1 of 12


These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the

Construction Contract, EJCDC C-700 (2007 Edition). All provisions which are not so amended or

supplemented remain in full force and effect.

The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions.

Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are

applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.

The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in

the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added thereto.

SC-1.01 Defined Terms

SC-1.01.A.21 Delete Paragraph 1.01.A.21 – General Requirements in its entirety and

insert the following in its place:

21. General Requirements – The General Requirements describe general

requirements unique to this Project and are contained in the

Technical Provisions.

SC-2.02 Copies of Documents

SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to two (2) printed or hard copies of

the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished

upon request at the cost of reproduction.

SC-2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

SC-2.03 Delete Paragraph 2.03.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the

Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within

30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement or within 135 days

after the day of the Bid opening, whichever date is earlier; or the Notice

to Proceed may be given at any time mutually agreed to by the Owner

and Contractor.

SC-4.01 Availability of Lands

SC-4.01 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.01.C:

A. Permanent improvements on private property are limited to those areas

having an executed easement agreement prior to installation. Contractor

is to comply with all terms, restrictions, special conditions, etc., as



Page 2 of 12

described in the easements. Costs of such compliance is to be reflected

in related work. No separate compensation will be made for this

compliance.

SC-4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

SC-4.02 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 4.02.B:

C. The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions

at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner:

1. Report dated June 7, 2016, prepared by Terracon Consultants, Inc.,

entitled: “Waterworks District 14 Maintenance Building”,

consisting of 30 pages. The “technical data” contained in such report

upon which Contractor may rely is limited to the test methods, test

results, and similar factual data, all as of the date they were made.

D. No drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site are known to Owner:

E. The reports and/or drawings identified above are not part of the Contract

Documents, but the “technical data” contained therein upon which

Contractor may rely, as expressly identified and established above, are

incorporated in the Contract Documents by reference and attached to the

end of these Supplementary Conditions. Contractor is not entitled to rely

upon any other information and data known to or identified by Owner or

Engineer.

SC-4.04 Underground Facilities

SC-4.04.B Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.04.B.2:

3. Shown or not shown or indicated or not indicated, Contractor shall be

fully responsible for having all existing Underground Facilities, within

the project limits, located by the owner of the facility prior to

commencement of the Work. The cost for this work shall be included in

the Contract Price.

SC-4.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions

SC-4.06 Delete Paragraphs 4.06.A and 4.06.B in their entirety and insert the

following:

A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions

at the Site are known to Owner.

B. Not Used.



Page 3 of 12

SC-5.03 Certificates of Insurance

SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 5.03.E:

F. The following must appear verbatim in the Insurance Certificate:

“Blanket additional insureds and blanket waiver of subrogation as

required by contract.”

SC-5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance

SC-5.04 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 5.04.B:

C. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 of the

General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the

following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations:

1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs

5.04.A.1 and A.2 of the General Conditions:

a. State: Statutory

b. Applicable Federal

(e.g., Longshoreman’s): Statutory

c. Employer’s Liability: $1,000,000

2. Contractor’s General Liability under Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through

A.6 of the General Conditions which shall include completed

operations and product liability coverages and eliminate the

exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody and

control of Contractor:

a. General Aggregate $2,000,000

b. Products - Completed

Operations Aggregate $1,000,000

c. Personal and Advertising

Injury $1,000,000

d. Each Occurrence

(Bodily Injury and

Property Damage) $1,000,000

e. Property Damage liability insurance will provide

Explosion, Collapse, and Under-ground coverages

where applicable.



Page 4 of 12

f. Excess or Umbrella Liability

General Aggregate $2,000,000

Each Occurrence $2,000,000

3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 5.04.A.6 of the General

Conditions:

a. Combined Single Limit of $1,000,000

4. The Contractor’s General Liability shall include Contractual

Liability coverage required as by Paragraph 5.04.B.3 of the General

Conditions.

SC-5.06 Property Insurance

SC-5.06.A. Delete Paragraph 5.06.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the

Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof.

Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible or self-insured

retention. This insurance shall:

1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer,

and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents and other

consultants and subcontractors of any of them, each of whom is

deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured

or loss payee;

2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” policy form that shall at

least include insurance for physical loss and damage to the Work,

temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in

transit and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes

of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and

malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition

occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage

(other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of

loss as may be specifically required by these Supplementary

Conditions.

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured

property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers

and architects);

4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another

location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being

incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and



Page 5 of 12

equipment have been included in an Application for Payment

recommended by Engineer;

5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner;

6. include testing and startup;

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise

agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30

days written notice to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of

insurance has been issued; and

8. comply with the requirements of Paragraph 5.06.C of the General

Conditions.

SC-6.02 Labor; Working Hours

SC-6.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.02.B:

A. Contractor shall provide the written notice required at least 48 hours

prior to intended commencement date.

SC-6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment


D. Suppliers of all materials or equipment furnished shall supply

manufacturer's printed warranties on all materials or equipment

furnished. The Contractor shall furnish these warranties with the Shop

Drawings submittal. The warranties shall warrant the materials or

equipment for a period of one (1) year from the filing of the Substantial

Completion certificate.

SC-6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

SC-6.06.B. Delete Paragraph 6.06B in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

B. Within ten (10) days of the Bid opening, the apparent Successful Bidder,

and any other Bidder so requested, shall submit the identity of all

Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities specified in the

Technical Provisions to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner

prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement. If Contractor has

submitted a list thereof, Owner’s acceptance (either in writing or by

failing to make written objection thereto prior to the Effective Date of

the Agreement) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual

or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable

objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable

replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual



Page 6 of 12

or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the

cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order

will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor,

Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a

replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer

to reject defective Work.

SC-6.06 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.06.G:

H. As a condition of award of a subcontract in relation to Contractor’s

prime contract with the Owner, subcontractor agrees that it shall

indemnify, hold harmless, and waive all claims, damages, losses, and

expenses, direct, indirect, or consequential (including but not limited to

fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other

professionals and court costs and expenses) arising out of or resulting

from the performance of its subcontract obligations in relation to

Contractor’s prime contract with Owner. In the event it is necessary to

enforce this Contract or subcontract in any judicial forum or Owner

selected arbitration, the parties agree that whoever substantially prevails

in the litigation shall be entitled to its reasonable attorney’s fees as fixed

by the court.

I. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent

practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor on account of

Work performed for Contractor by a particular Subcontractor or

Supplier.

SC-6.10 Taxes

SC-6.10 Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.10.A:

B. Owner is exempt from payment of sales and compensating use taxes of

the State of Louisiana and of cities and parishes thereof on all materials

to be incorporated into the Work.

1. Owner will furnish the required certificates of tax exemption to

Contractor for use in the purchase of supplies and materials to be

incorporated into the Work.

2. Owner’s exemption does not apply to construction tools, machinery,

equipment, or other property purchased by or leased by Contractor,

or to supplies or materials not incorporated into the Work.



Page 7 of 12

SC-6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples

SC-6.17 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.17.E:

F. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information

and accuracy in order to obtain required approval of an item with no

more than three (3) submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for

reviewing subsequent submittals of Shop Drawings, samples, or other

items requiring approval and Contractor shall reimburse Owner for

Engineer’s charges for such time.

G. In the event that Contractor requests a change of a previously approved

item, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for Engineer’s charges for its

review time unless the need for such change is beyond the control of

Contractor.

SC-6.20 Indemnification

SC-6.20 Delete Paragraphs 6.20.A and 6.20.B in their entirety and insert the

following:

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor

shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and their

consultants, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages,

losses and expense, direct, indirect or consequential (including but not

limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other

professionals and court and arbitration costs) arising out of or resulting

from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim,

damage, loss or expense (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,

disease or death, or to injury of corporal or incorporeal property (other

than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom or to

any other reason for economic loss by the claimant, and (b) is caused in

whole or in part by any negligent act or omission, or breach of this

contract, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, any person or organization

directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any

of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,

regardless of whether or not it is caused in part b y a party indemnified

hereunder or arises by or is imposed by Law and Regulations regardless

of the negligence of any such party.

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their

consultants, agents or employees by any person, agent or employee or

Contractor, and Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or

indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the

Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the

indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited

in any way by any limitation on the legal remedies or the amount or type



Page 8 of 12

of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or

any such Subcontractor or other person or organization under worker's or

workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit act or other employee

benefit acts.

SC-7.01 Related Work at Site


D. Contractor shall schedule work to avoid conflict with Owner’s

operational schedule.

SC-7.04 Claims Between Contractors

SC-7.04 Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph GC-7.03:

SC-7.04 Claims Between Contractors

A. Should Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any other

contractor at the Site, or should any claim arising out of Contractor’s

performance of the Work at the Site be made by any other contractor

against Contractor, Owner, Engineer, or the construction coordinator,

then Contractor (without involving Owner, Engineer, or construction

coordinator) shall either (1) remedy the damage, (2) agree to compensate

the other contractor for remedy of the damage, or (3) remedy the damage

and attempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or

otherwise resolve the dispute by arbitration or at law.

B. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and

Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, the

construction coordinator and the officers, directors, partners, employees,

agents and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them

from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including, but

not limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and

other professionals and court and arbitration costs) arising directly,

indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable,

brought by any other contractor against Owner, Engineer, consultants, or

the construction coordinator to the extent said claim is based on or arises

out of Contractor’s performance of the Work. Should another contractor

cause damage to the Work or property of Contractor or should the

performance of work by any other contractor at the Site give rise to any

other Claim, Contractor shall not institute any action, legal or equitable,

against Owner, Engineer, or the construction coordinator or permit any

action against any of them to be maintained and continued in its name or

for its benefit in any court or before any arbiter which seeks to impose

liability on or to recover damages from Owner, Engineer, or the

construction coordinator on account of any such damage or Claim.



Page 9 of 12

C. If Contractor is delayed at any time in performing or furnishing the

Work by any act or neglect of another contractor, and Owner and

Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent of any adjustment in

Contract Times attributable thereto, Contractor may make a Claim for an

extension of times in accordance with Article 12. An extension of the

Contract Times shall be Contractor’s exclusive remedy with respect to

Owner, Engineer, and construction coordinator for any delay, disruption,

interference, or hindrance caused by any other contractor. This paragraph

does not prevent recovery from Owner, Engineer, or construction

coordinator for activities that are their respective responsibilities.

SC-9.03 Project Representative

SC-9.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 9.03.A:

B. The duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of Resident

Project Representative shall be as set forth in the attached Exhibit “SC-

9.03” which is part of the engineering contract.

SC-11.01 Cost of the Work

SC-11.01.A.5.c Delete Paragraph 11.01.A.5.c in its entirety and insert the following in

its place:

c. Construction Equipment and Machinery:

1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the

parts thereof in accordance with rental agreements approved by

Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of

transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and

removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the

terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such

equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof

is no longer necessary for the Work.

2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor will be

paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the Equipment Rental

Rate Book as defined in the Louisiana Public Bid Law, or if not

available, the latest edition of “Blue Book” rates, or special

equipment rates agreed to by the Owner and Engineer. An hourly

rate will be computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176.

These computed rates will include all operating costs. Costs will

include the time the equipment or machinery is in use on the

changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading,

unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal when directly

attributable to the changed Work. The cost of any such

equipment or machinery, or parts thereof, shall cease to accrue



Page 10 of 12

when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the changed

Work. Equipment or machinery with a value of less than $1,000

will be considered small tools.

SC-11.03 Unit Price Work

SC-11.03.D Delete Paragraph 11.03.D in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

D. Where unit prices are contained in the initial Contract, no deviations

shall be allowed in computing negotiated Change Order costs.

SC-12.01 Change of Contract Price

SC-12.01.C Contractor's Fee. Delete the semicolon at the end of GC 12.01.C.2.c,

and add the following language:

, provided, however, that on any subcontracted work the total maximum

fee to be paid by Owner under this subparagraph shall be no greater than

25 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor who actually

performs the work;

SC-13.03 Tests and Inspections

SC-13.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 13.03.F:

G. Contractor shall provide at no cost to the Owner any required specimens

for testing purposes.

H. Contractor is responsible for all costs for follow-up testing required as a

result of failed tests.

SC-14.02 Progress Payments

SC-14.02 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.02.A.3:

4. Application for Payment shall be made using the form provided

subsequent to Award of the Contract.

5. The Application for Payment shall be executed by an authorized

representative of the Contractor. An applicable document shall

accompany the first Application for Payment that provides evidence

as to authorizing the signature, e.g. a corporate resolution for a

corporation.

6. To ensure the processing period is complied with and the processing

is effectively interfaced with Owner status reporting periods and

meetings, the following schedule applies:



Page 11 of 12

a. Work included for payment shall consist of work performed

prior to the monthly cutoff date. The cutoff date shall be

established at the preconstruction conference in a manner to be

consistent with the Owner’s administrative schedule.

b. Contractor shall submit the original and six (6) copies of the

Application for Payment to the Engineer no later than five (5)

days after the cutoff date.

c. Engineer will process and submit the estimate to the Owner with

Recommendation for Payment as provided in the General

Conditions.

d. All estimates are to be submitted to the Engineer.

e. Final estimates shall be processed in accordance with the

General Conditions as modified or supplemented by the

Supplementary Conditions.

SC-14.04 Substantial Completion

SC-14.04.A Delete Paragraph 14.04.A in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

A. Specific items of work required to be completed prior to consideration of

the Project as being substantially complete are described in the General

Requirements. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its

intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that

the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically

listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a

certificate of Substantial Completion.

SC-14.04.C Add the following sentences to the end of Paragraph 14.04.C:

Any punch list generated during the project will include the cost estimates

for the particular items of work the Engineer has developed based on the

mobilization, labor, material, and equipment costs of correcting each punch

list item. Once executed by all parties, the Contractor shall have the

certificate recorded by the Clerk of Court in the parish where the work is

located. Failure to have the certificate recorded promptly may delay

payment of the retainage.

SC-14.07 Final Payment

SC-14.07.A Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.07.A.2.d:

d. a certified clear lien certificate on the Contract obtained from the Clerk

of Court after 45 days from the recordation date of the certificate of

substantial completion.



Page 12 of 12

SC-16.01 Methods and Procedure

SC-16.01 Delete Article 16 – Dispute Resolution in its entirety and insert the

following in its place:

A. Nothing in the Contract shall be legally construed to mean that any

express or implied incidental obligation exists under this Contract that

requires the Owner to engage in arbitration with Contractor in relation to

any dispute arising out of this Contract. Owner expressly reserves the

right to determine if arbitration of a dispute is in its best interest. The

Owner’s discretion concerning a decision to agree to arbitration of a

dispute, or not, is absolute and shall not be reviewable by any court as

breach of this Contract.

SC-17.01 Giving Notice

SC-17.01 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01.A.2:

3. Notice is copied and delivered/mailed in like manner to the

Engineer.

SC-17.07 Recovery of Attorney’s Fees

SC-17.07 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.06

A. In the event that it is necessary to enforce this contract in any judicial

forum or Owner selected arbitration, the parties agree that whoever

substantially prevails in the litigation shall be entitled to its reasonable

attorney’s fees as fixed by the court.

EXHIBIT SC – 4.02

Referred to under SC – 4.02 of the

Supplementary Conditions

Waterworks District 14 Maintenance Building

Starks, Louisiana

June 7, 2016

Terracon Project No. EH165157

Prepared for:


Sulphur, Louisiana

Prepared by:

Terracon Consultants, Inc.

Baton Rouge, Louisiana

Terracon Consultants, Inc. 2822 O’Neal Lane Building B Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70816

P [225] 344 6052 F [225] 344 6346 terracon.com

June 7, 2016


600 N. Cities Service Highway

Sulphur, LA 70663

C/O: Mr. Mark McCarty P: 337-625-8353

E: [email protected]

Re: Waterworks District 14 Maintenance Building Starks, Louisiana

Terracon Project Number: EH165157

Dear Mr. McCarty:

We have completed the geotechnical engineering services for the above-referenced project.

This work was performed in accordance with our proposal number PEH165157 dated May 2,

2016.

This report presents the findings of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical

recommendations concerning earthwork and the design and construction of foundations and

floor slabs for the proposed project.

We should continue to collaborate with you as you finalize the designs. We should also review

the pertinent aspects of the plans and specifications and provide construction materials and

engineering testing services when the project moves into construction.

Sincerely,

Terracon Consultants, Inc.

Alex Kavaleuski, P.E. Stephen E. Greaber, P.E.

Project Engineer Principal

Enclosure

Waterworks District 14 Maintenance Building ■ Starks, LA

June 7, 2016 ■ Terracon Project No. EH165157

Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable

TABLE OF CONTENTS PROJECT DESCRIPTION

SITE CONDITIONS

GEOTECHNICAL MODEL

EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES

SITE CLASSIFICATION FOR SEISMIC DESIGN

GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW

SITE PREPARATION

SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS

FLOOR SLABS

PROJECT CONSIDERATIONS

APPENDIX A – EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY RESULTS

Exhibit A-1 Site Location Plan Exhibit A-2 Exploration Plan

Exhibits A-3 and A-4 Boring Logs APPENDIX B – SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS Exhibit B-1 General Notes Exhibit B-2 Unified Soil Classification




PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Our initial understanding of the project was provided in our Stage 1 submittal in Project

Understanding. During the period of collaboration that has transpired since the project was

initiated, our understanding of the project conditions has been modified to reflect the following.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

Project Location

The project site is within northeast quadrant of the intersection of Charles

Stanley Loop and LA Highway 109 in Starks, Louisiana.

Approximate Latitude 30.31203 degrees, Longitude -93.66101 degrees.

See Site Location.

Proposed

Structure A one-story maintenance building with a footprint of about 2,400 square feet.

Building

construction A pre-engineered metal building with slab-on-grade.

Maximum loads

Columns: 20 kips (compression), 20 kips (uplift)

Walls: 2 kips per linear foot

Slabs: 150 pounds per square foot (psf)

Grading/Slopes

Finished floor elevation is expected to be at Elevation +33.32 feet Mean Sea

Level (MSL).

Up to 1 foot of feet of fill will be required to develop slab subgrade.

Below grade

construction Six floor drains.




SITE CONDITIONS

The following description of site conditions is derived from our site visit in association with the

field exploration and our review of local, publically available geologic and topographic maps.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

Parcel

Information

The project site is within northeast quadrant of the intersection of Charles Stanley

Loop and LA Highway 109 in Starks, Louisiana.

Site History

Based on Google EarthTM historic aerial images, the site had been heavily wooded

until late 2009. Later images show a cleared site adjacent to a recently constructed

water tower.

Existing

improvements Cleared land south of the existing water tower.

Current ground

cover Grass

Existing

topography Relatively flat at approximate Elevation +32 feet MSL.

Geology

The property is located within an area of Beaumont Alloformation (Ppbe) of Prairie

Terrace deposits of Pleistocene Age. Beaumont Alloformation consists of plain

deposits of late to middle Pleistocene streams: the oldest alloformation and

topographically highest surface or the Prairie Allogroup units of southwestern

Louisiana. It exhibits the relict channels of the Red and Calcasieu rivers, and

includes deposits of the Ingleside barrier trend within the Lake Charles quadrangle.

Portion of Louisiana Geologic Survey – Lake Charles Quadrangle (2002)

SITE




ITEM DESCRIPTION

The Pleistocene Age deposits typically consist of medium stiff to very stiff tan and

light gray silty clays and clays with silt and sand layering. The soils within the Prairie

Terrace deposits typically provide good foundation support for relatively light to

moderately loaded structures, are overconsolidated, and normally only marginally

compressible. In some areas that are very dry and desiccated, the potential for

expansive properties exists, but these conditions are not typical of the Prairie Terrace

deposits.

Portion of USDA Soil Survey Map

Based on USDA Web soil survey, the site is in an area of the Kinder-Gist complex

(Kd) consisting of loamy fluviomarine deposits of late Pleistocene age and deposits

derived from igneous metamorphic and sedimentary rock. Kinder soils comprised of

silt loam underlain by silty clay loam with groundwater typically at 0 to 24 inches. Gist

soils also are comprised of silt loam underlain by silty clay loam; however, with

groundwater typically at 38 to 59 inches.




GEOTECHNICAL MODEL

The following table provides a summary of the generalized soil conditions at the site.

Stratum

Typical

Stratum Base

(feet)

Material Description Consistency

Surface 0.35 Topsoil N/A

1 2 Silt with Sand (ML) /

Silty Clay with Sand (CL-ML) Medium Stiff

2 8 Fat Clay (CH) / Lean Clay (CL) Medium Stiff to Very Stiff

3 24 Lean Clay (CL) Stiff to Very Stiff

Notable

Variations

1. Consistency of samples from Boring B-02 is identified as medium stiff; however, dry

unit weights of 100 to 110 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) suggest that this is relatively

compact material. It should be noted that strength and compressibility interpretations

from unconfined compression tests in silt, silty clay, and lean clay, especially with sand

layering, can be misleading.

The table includes generalizations and does not reflect specific conditions at each exploration

point. Conditions encountered at each boring location are indicated on the individual boring

logs. Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate location of changes

in soil types; in situ, the transition between materials may be gradual.

Based on the site history we expected that fill material would be encountered at the site; however,

debris or other inclusions indicating presence of fill were not encountered within the soil samplers.

Due to the small sample size, collected by Shelby tubes, it is not always possible to determine the

presence of fill, especially if the fill material consists of the locally excavated soils and free from

manmade inclusions within the sample; therefore, the fill material is often mistaken for native soil.

Based on the site history it is likely that disturbed native soils are present at the surface of the site

extending to a depth of approximately 2 feet.

Groundwater Conditions

Groundwater was not observed in the borings while drilling or for the short duration that the

borings were allowed to remain open. However, this does not necessarily mean these borings

terminated above groundwater. Due to the low permeability of the soils encountered in the

borings, a relatively long period of time may be necessary for the groundwater level to develop

and stabilize in a borehole in these materials. Long term observations in piezometers or

observation wells sealed from the influence of surface water are often required to define the

field or in-situ groundwater level in materials of this type. Based on the USDA soil survey, the

depth to groundwater at the site may range from 0 to 59 inches below the ground surface.

SITE




Groundwater level fluctuations occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, runoff,

river or creek levels, and other factors that are not evident at the time of drilling. Water levels in

the nearby drainage ditches may also influence groundwater level at the site. Therefore, the

groundwater levels that may prevail during construction or at other times in the life of the

structure may be higher or lower than the levels indicated on the boring logs. The possibility of

groundwater level fluctuations should be considered when developing the design and

construction plans for this project.




EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES

Field Exploration

Our field exploration work included the drilling and sampling of exploratory soil borings

consistent with the following schedule.

NUMBER OF

LOCATIONS

TYPE OF

EXPLORATION

(BORINGS/CPT)

EXPLORATION DEPTH

(FEET) LOCATION

2 Borings 24 Building

The locations of field exploration points were established in the field by Terracon’s exploration

team using a hand-held GPS unit to establish boring locations with reference to known points.

The accuracy of the exploration points is usually within 10 to 20 feet of the noted location. The

ground surface elevations are estimated from the most recent USGS topographic maps, and/or

Google EarthTM imagery and the accuracy of the ground surface at each point is probably about 2

feet.

Soil Boring: We advanced the soil borings with a track-mounted drill rig using continuous flight

augers (solid stem). We primarily obtained thin-walled tube samples to secure relatively

undisturbed samples. Shelby tube samples were obtained hydraulically pushing a seamless steel

tube with a sharpened cutting edge into the boring to obtain a relatively undisturbed sample of

cohesive soil. We reported the sampling depths, penetration distances, and the standard

penetration resistance values on the boring logs. In the field, we placed the samples into

containers, seal them, and return them to the laboratory for observation, testing and classification.

Our exploration team prepared field boring logs as part of the drilling operations. These field

logs include visual classifications of the materials encountered during drilling and our

interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. Final boring logs were prepared

from the field logs. The final boring logs represent the engineer's interpretation of the field logs

and include modifications based on observations and tests of the samples in the laboratory.

Groundwater Observations: During the soil boring advancement and sampling operation,

observations for free groundwater were made. Information regarding water level observations is

recorded in the “groundwater” column on the soil boring logs. Other information regarding water

level observations has been noted under “Groundwater Level Data” at the bottom of each log.

Boring Abandonment: Upon completion of the field exploration phase of this study, each boring

was sealed in accordance with State regulations.




Laboratory Testing

The project engineer reviewed the field data and assigned various laboratory tests to better

understand the engineering properties of the various soil and rock strata as necessary for this

project. Procedural standards noted below are for reference to methodology in general. In some

cases, variations to methods are applied as a result of local practice or professional judgment.

Standards noted below include reference to other, related standards. Such references are not

necessarily applicable to describe the specific test performed.

■ ASTM D2216-10 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass

■ ASTM D4318-10e1 Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils

■ ASTM D2166/D2166M-13 Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive

Strength of Cohesive Soil

The laboratory testing program may often include examination of soil samples by an engineer.

Based on the material’s texture and plasticity, we describe and classify the soil samples in

accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System.




SITE CLASSIFICATION FOR SEISMIC DESIGN

Design of buildings and other structures subject to earthquake ground motions requires

classification of the upper 100 feet of the site profile in accordance with Chapter 20 of ASCE 7.

The Site Class types are listed below and are basically defined by an average value of either

shear wave velocity, standard penetration resistance, or undrained shear strength.

A. Hard Rock

B. Rock

C. Very dense soil and soft rock

D. Stiff soil

E. Soft clay soil

F. Soils vulnerable to potential failure or collapse under seismic loading

Based on the results of our site characterization program, we conclude that Site Class D is

appropriate for the subject site. Note that the scope of services did not include site profile

determination to a depth of 100 feet. Explorations for this project extended to a maximum depth

of 24 feet. Based on our knowledge of the geologic formation, the assumed site classification is

considered reasonable. Additional exploration to deeper depths could be performed to confirm

the conditions below the current depth of exploration. Alternatively, a geophysical exploration

could be utilized to define the seismic site class.

The site is located approximately 8 miles southwest of De Quincy fault (fault-line scarp). This

fault is active but have not been demonstrated to be seismic (it does not generate detectable

earthquakes). Rather, the fault-line scarps are the result of the down warping of the Mississippi

River embayment and have been shown to cause damage to roads, pavements, and building

structures in their vicinity gradually, over periods of decades. Other faults have been postulated

in south Louisiana but remain speculative. Some of these could be faults that have become

inactive, and some could be active faults with very small displacements, associated with

but subsidiary to the known faults. Due to the low seismicity in the region and absence of

soils prone to liquefaction such as loose sands the liquefaction potential of soil at the site is

estimated to be low.




GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW

The near surface silt and silty clay soils appeared relatively stable at the time of our exploration;

however, these soils can easily become unstable with typical construction processes, especially

after precipitation events; therefore, effective drainage should be completed early in the

construction sequence and maintained during and after construction. If possible, clearing and

grubbing should be performed during the warmer and drier time of the year, when conditions are

more conducive for drying these soils. If clearing and grubbing are performed during the winter

or spring months, an increased risk for possible undercutting and replacement of unstable

subgrade soils.

The subgrade soils within the proposed building is expected to consist of silt with sand and silty

clay. These materials have a narrow range of moisture contents where sufficient levels of

compaction can be achieved and then sustained during the compaction of the fill above.

Therefore, if low moisture content can me maintained during construction activities, by

performing earthwork during dry season with adequate grading and drainage measures, leaving

this material in place is possible; otherwise, removal and replacement with more stable

engineering fill material or perhaps chemical treatment with either cement or Class C or F fly

ash from an approved LADOTD QPL listed source should be carefully considered and included

in the project budget. Mitigation measures should be determined by the geotechnical engineer

based on conditions observed at the time of construction. Additional site preparation

recommendations, including subgrade improvement, fill placement, and excavations are

provided in the Site Preparation section.

High plasticity fat and moderate plasticity lean clays soil was encountered below a depth of 2

feet at the site. In general, fat clays are typically considered to exhibit potential for shrink-swell

movements with changes in moisture. In particular, clays that are identified as being dry and

desiccated are considered more susceptible to potential swell movements. It has been our

experience in south Louisiana, that clay soils that exhibit PI>25, but that are at moisture content

sufficiently above the plastic limit will typically exhibit minimal swell potential. The results of

moisture testing of the fat clays indicate that the soils within the upper 5 feet are approximately

3 percent below to 6 percent above the plastic limit underlain by clays likely below the prevailing

ground water elevation. It is our opinion that a lightly loaded floor slab placed over an existing

silt and silty clay subgrade underlain by the thin strata of high plasticity fat clays at the current

moisture levels can be constructed with an anticipated potential vertical rise (PVR) of 1 inch or

less. However, the on-site soils at these moisture contents are likely to be easily disturbed and

would provide a relatively poor slab subgrade with a low modulus of subgrade reaction. Based

upon our experience with similar clay conditions in the region, it is our opinion that a lightly

loaded floor slab placed upon a minimum of 12 inches of low volume change engineered fill

over the on-site stable subgrade at the current moisture levels can be constructed to provide an

acceptable modulus of subgrade reaction and with an anticipated potential vertical rise (PVR) of

1 inch or less.




The proposed maintenance building can be supported on a shallow foundation system bearing on

native stiff to very stiff lean/fat clay or engineered fill. The Shallow Foundation section

addresses support of the structure.




SITE PREPARATION

The combination of a relatively flat site and presence of moisture sensitive surficial soils would

require establishing effective drainage early in the construction sequence and maintaining it

after construction. This is particularly important if any aspects of construction are attempted

during wet periods.

The site should be cleared and grubbed to remove roots, grass, topsoil, organic laden soil,

organic matter, and any rubble or debris encountered. Topsoil measurements were made at the

boring locations; however, stripping depths at or between our boring locations and across the

site could vary considerably. The depth of stripping should be on the order of 4 to 6 inches;

however, we recommend that actual stripping depths be evaluated by a representative of

Terracon during construction to aid in preventing removal of excess material.

Following clearing and grubbing the exposed subgrade should be proof-rolled (under the

observation of Terracon personnel) with a loaded tandem-axle dump truck or other heavy,

rubber-tired construction equipment weighing between 15 and 20 tons (total vehicle weight) to

locate any areas that are soft or unstable. Proof-rolling should be performed after a suitable

period of dry weather to avoid degrading an otherwise acceptable subgrade and to reduce the

amount of undercutting/remedial work required. In places where the results of the proof-rolling

are questionable, it may be prudent to excavate shallow test pits to further assess the near

surface materials. If soft/unstable areas are encountered, they should be mitigated. If the areas

are isolated, mitigation by limited overexcavation and replacement with competent soils

approved by the geotechnical engineer at the time of construction, may suffice. If widespread

instability is encountered, chemical treatment with either cement or Class C or F fly ash from an

approved LADOTD QPL listed source may be recommended.

Material Types

Engineered fill should meet the following material property requirements:

FILL TYPE 1,2 USCS

CLASSIFICATION ACCEPTABLE LOCATION FOR PLACEMENT

Lean Clay, Clayey

Sand (Imported)

CL, SC

(LL<45, 10<PI<25) All locations and elevations




FILL TYPE 1,2 USCS

CLASSIFICATION ACCEPTABLE LOCATION FOR PLACEMENT

On-site soils

Primarily CL-ML, ML

Typically LL<30

PI<10

The on-site soils excavated from the upper 2 feet

are expected to consist of silty clay and silt. This

material is typically not recommended for use as

engineered fill for the building pad due to difficult

compaction characteristics and stability issues at

higher moistures. They may be considered for

use in construction of a cement treated subbase for

pavements and for building slabs provided they can

be efficiently placed and compacted.

On-site soils CH

(LL≥50, PI≥30)

The on-site soils below a depth of 2 feet in vicinity

of Boring B-02 are expected to consist of high

plasticity fat clay. This material is typically not

recommended for use as engineered fill without

lime treatment2 due to difficult compaction

characteristics, stability issues at higher moistures

and shrink/swell potential. It can be used as backfill

in the landscape areas without lime treatment.

1. Controlled, compacted fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter and debris. A

sample of each material type should be submitted to the geotechnical engineer for evaluation. 2. Delineation of fat clays and silt/lean clays should be performed in the field by a qualified geotechnical engineer or

their representative, and could require additional laboratory testing.

3. For budgetary purposes a minimum 8% lime by volume should be used.

Compaction Requirements

Engineered fill should meet the following compaction requirements:

ITEM DESCRIPTION

Fill Lift Thickness

9-inches or less in loose thickness when heavy, self-

propelled compaction equipment is used

or

4 to 6 inches in loose thickness when hand-guided

equipment (i.e. jumping jack or plate compactor) is used

Compaction Requirements 1 Minimum 95% of the standard Proctor maximum dry

density (ASTM D 698)

Moisture Content of Cohesive Soil

Within the range of 1% below to 3% above the optimum

moisture content value as determined by the standard

Proctor test at the time of placement and compaction with

stability present. Low plasticity silt and silty clay soils may

require a narrower range of moisture contents to achieve

and then sustain sufficient levels of compaction.




ITEM DESCRIPTION

1. The moisture content and compaction should be measured for each lift of engineered fill during

placement. Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate the specified moisture or

compaction limits have not been met, the area represented by the test should be reworked and

retested as required until the specified moisture and compaction requirements are achieved. The

zone of fill compacted to meet this criteria should extend at least 5 feet horizontally beyond the

building footprint.

Fill Construction Observation and Testing

The exposed subgrade and each lift of compacted fill should be tested, evaluated, and

reworked, as necessary, until approved by the geotechnical engineer’s representative prior to

placement of additional lifts. We recommend that each lift of fill be tested for density and

moisture content at a frequency of one test for every 2,500 square feet of compacted fill in the

building areas and 5,000 square feet in pavement areas. We recommend one density and

moisture content test for every 50 linear feet of compacted utility trench backfill.

Utility Trench Backfill

Utility trenches are a common source of water infiltration and migration. All utility trenches that

penetrate beneath the building should be effectively sealed to restrict water intrusion and flow

through the trenches that could migrate below the building. We recommend constructing an

effective “trench plug” that extends at least 5 feet out from the face of the building exterior. The

plug material should consist of cementitious “flowable fill” or impervious clay. The trench plug

material should be placed to surround the utility line. If used, the clay trench plug material

should be placed and compacted to comply with the moisture content and compaction

recommendations for areal fill stated previously in this report.

Grading and Drainage

All grades must provide effective drainage away from the building during and after construction.

Water permitted to pond next to the building can result in greater soil movements than those

discussed in this report. These greater movements can result in unacceptable differential floor

slab and/or foundation movements, cracked slabs and walls, and roof leaks. Estimated

movements described in this report are based on effective drainage for the life of the structure

and cannot be relied upon if effective drainage is not maintained. The roof should have

gutters/drains with downspouts that discharge onto splash blocks at a distance of at least 10

feet from the building.

Exposed ground should be sloped and maintained at a minimum 10 percent (5 percent where

pavement will abut the building, or less to comply with ADA requirements) away from the




building for at least 10 feet beyond the perimeter of the building. After building construction and

landscaping, we recommend verifying final grades to document that effective drainage has been

achieved. Grades around the structure should also be periodically inspected and adjusted as

necessary, as part of the structure’s maintenance program. Where paving or flatwork abuts the

structure, we recommend a maintenance program to effectively seal and maintain joints to

prevent surface water infiltration.

Earthwork Construction Considerations

It is anticipated that shallow excavations for the proposed construction can be accomplished

with conventional earthmoving equipment. Upon completion of filling and grading, care should

be taken to maintain the subgrade moisture content prior to construction of floor slabs.

Construction traffic over the completed subgrade should be avoided to the extent practical. The

site should also be graded to prevent ponding of surface water on the prepared subgrades or in

excavations. If the subgrade should become desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the affected

material should be removed or these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and

recompacted prior to floor slab construction and observed by Terracon.

Surface water should not be allowed to pond on the site and soak into the soil during

construction. Construction staging should provide drainage of surface water and precipitation

away from the building areas. Any water that collects over or adjacent to construction areas

should be promptly removed, along with any softened or disturbed soils. Surface water control

in the form of sloping surfaces, drainage ditches and trenches, and sump pits and pumps will be

important to avoid ponding and associated delays due to precipitation and seepage.

As stated in Stage 2 Groundwater Conditions section, the groundwater was not encountered at

time the borings were drilled. However, according to the USDA soil survey, the depth to

groundwater at the site may range from 0 to 59 inches below the ground surface. It appears that

seepage in shallow less than 4 feet deep excavations is possible; either of most likely perched

water from the upper silt with sand and silty clay with sand soil or groundwater from underlying low

permeability lean and fat clays; however, it should be controllable with standard sump pump

techniques. It should be anticipated that the groundwater table could rise and affect excavation

efforts. Any excavations performed below a depth of 4 feet should consider effects of groundwater

on excavation.

As a minimum, excavations should be performed in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926,

Subpart P, “Excavations” and its appendices, and in accordance with any applicable local, state,

and federal safety regulations. The contractor should be aware that slope height, slope

inclination, and excavation depth should in no instance exceed those specified by these safety

regulations. Flatter slopes than those dictated by these regulations may be required depending

upon the soil conditions encountered and other external factors. These regulations are strictly




enforced and if they are not followed, the owner, contractor, and/or earthwork and utility

subcontractor could be liable and subject to substantial penalties.

Construction site safety is the sole responsibility of the contractor who controls the means,

methods and sequencing of construction operations. Under no circumstances shall the

information provided herein be interpreted to mean that Terracon is assuming any responsibility

for construction site safety or the contractor's activities; such responsibility shall neither be

implied nor inferred.

Terracon should be retained during the construction phase of the project to observe earthwork

and to perform necessary tests and observations during subgrade preparation; proofrolling;

placement and compaction of controlled compacted fills; backfilling of excavations into the

completed subgrade, and just prior to construction of building floor slabs.




SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS

Design Parameters

PARAMETER ISOLATED COLUMNS CONTINUOUS

Maximum net allowable bearing pressure on

existing soils or engineered fill 1 2,500 psf 2,500 psf

Required bearing stratum 2 Stiff to very stiff lean/fat clay or engineered fill

Bearing stratum should be verified by Terracon.

Minimum foundation dimensions 24 inches 16 inches

Uplift Resistance 3 Buoyant unit weight of concrete below grade (88 pcf)

+ buoyant unit weight of soil above footing (55 pcf).

Ultimate coefficient of sliding friction 4 0.32

Ultimate passive pressure 4 300 pcf, equivalent fluid density

Minimum embedment below finished grade 24 inches 24 inches

Est. total settlement from structural loads 5 < 1 inch < 1 inch

Estimated differential settlement 5 < 1/2 inch between

columns <1/2 inch over 40 feet

1. The maximum net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding

overburden pressure at the footing base elevation. An appropriate factor of safety has been applied. These

bearing pressure values can be increased by 1/3 for transient loads.

2. Unsuitable or soft soils should be undercut, and the footings should be deepened to bear on the competent

bearing stratum or could bear on lean concrete extending from the foundation base to competent bearing

stratum.

3. Apply Factor of safety of at least 1.5 to this value when designing for uplift forces.

4. The shallow foundation excavation sides must be nearly vertical and the concrete should be placed neat

against these vertical faces for the passive earth pressure values to be valid. Passive resistance in the

upper 3 feet of the soil profile should be neglected. If passive resistance is used to resist lateral loads, the

base friction should be neglected. Apply a factor of safety of at least 2.0 to this value when designing for

lateral force resistance.

5. Settlements as a result of 2 feet of fill and the structural loads as noted in Project Description.




Foundation Construction Considerations

We should observe the footing excavations prior to placement of steel and concrete. If

unsuitable bearing soils are encountered in footing excavations, the following measures can be

implemented:

■ Excavation could be extended deeper to suitable native soils so that the footing will bear

directly on these soils at the lower level.

■ Excavation could be extended deeper to suitable native soils and then backfilled with

lean concrete to the design footing level (left figure).

■ Excavation could be extended deeper and wider to suitable native soils and then

backfilled with properly compacted engineered/structural fill to the design footing level

(right figure).

The following precautions are essential to the satisfactory performance of shallow foundations:

■ Provide positive drainage away from the foundations, both during and after construction.

■ Avoid excavations during inclement weather and place concrete within the excavations

within 24 hours after completion of the excavations.

■ Verify that the excavations are completely within the required bearing stratum or

engineered fill and remove and replace any unacceptable soils as discussed herein.

■ Maintain adequate moisture levels in exposed excavation and slab subgrades, but do

not allow the areas to become saturated.

■ Place a “mudmat” of lean concrete to seal the bearing stratum in the event wet

conditions are experienced or expected.

■ Minimize traffic in excavations to only that necessary to place the steel and concrete for

the footings.

■ Remove free water in the excavations prior to placing concrete.




FLOOR SLABS

Design Parameters

ITEM DESCRIPTION

Floor slab support

Minimum 12 inches of engineered fill over stable proof-rolled

subgrade. Depending on stability observed at the time of

construction, cement treatment of natural silt soil may be required.

Modulus of subgrade reaction 100 pounds per square inch per inch (psi/in) for maintenance

building point loading conditions

Vapor barrier Project Specific. 1

Structural considerations Floor slabs should be structurally independent of building. 2

1. The use of a vapor retarder should be considered beneath concrete slabs on grade that will be

covered with wood, tile, carpet or other moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or when the

slab will support equipment sensitive to moisture (e.g. equipment within the proposed freezer).

When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder, the slab designer should refer to ACI 302

and/or ACI 360 for procedures and cautions regarding the use and placement of a vapor retarder

2. Floor slabs should be structurally independent of any building footings or walls to reduce the

possibility of floor slab cracking caused by differential movements between the slab and

foundation. Where floor slabs are tied to perimeter walls or turn-down slabs to meet structural or

other construction objectives, our experience indicates that any differential movement between the

walls and slabs will likely be observed in adjacent slab expansion joints or floor slab cracks that

occur beyond the length of the structural dowels. The structural engineer should account for this

potential differential settlement through use of sufficient control joints, appropriate reinforcing or

other means.

Floor Slab Construction Considerations

On most project sites, the site grading is generally accomplished early in the construction phase.

However as construction proceeds, the subgrade may be disturbed due to utility excavations,

construction traffic, desiccation, rainfall, etc. As a result, the floor slab subgrade may not be

suitable for placement of base rock and concrete, and corrective action will be required.

Terracon should review the condition of the floor slab subgrades immediately prior to placement of

the granular leveling course and construction of the slabs. Particular attention should be paid to

high traffic areas that were rutted and disturbed earlier and to areas containing backfilled

trenches. Areas where unsuitable conditions are located should be repaired by removing and

replacing the affected material with properly compacted fill.




PROJECT CONSIDERATIONS

Our work is conducted with the understanding of the project as noted in Project

Understanding. Verification of any stated assumptions and revision of our understanding to

reflect actual conditions is important to our work, and the design team should collaborate with

Terracon to confirm this understanding.

The design team should collaborate with Terracon to prepare the final design plans and

specifications. This facilitates the incorporation of our opinions related to implementation of our

geotechnical recommendations.

Our analysis and opinions are based upon our understanding of the geotechnical conditions in

the area, the data obtained from the site exploration performed and from our understanding of

the project. Variations will occur between exploration point locations, across the site, or due to

the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of such variations may

not become evident until during or after construction. So, Terracon should be retained to

provide observation and testing services during grading, excavation, foundation construction

and other earth-related construction phases of the project. If variations appear, we can provide

further evaluation and supplemental recommendations. If variations are noted in the absence of

our observation and testing services on-site, we should be immediately notified so that we can

provide evaluation and supplemental recommendations.

Our scope of services does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or

biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of

pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for

such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken.

Our services and any correspondence are intended for the exclusive use of our client for

specific application to the project discussed and are accomplished in accordance with generally

accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are

intended or made.

Site characteristics as provided are for design purposes and not to estimate excavation cost.

Any use of our report in that regard is done at the sole risk of the excavating cost estimator as

there may be variations on the site that are not apparent in the data that could significantly

impact excavation cost. Any parties charged with estimating excavation costs should seek their

own site characterization for that specific purposes to obtain the specific level of detail

necessary for costing. Site safety, and other cost estimating including, excavation support, and

dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In the event that changes in the

nature, design, or location of the project are planned, our conclusions and recommendations

shall not be considered valid unless we review the changes and either verify or modify our

conclusions in writing.

APPENDIX A

EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY RESULTS

TOPOGRAPHIC MAP IMAGE COURTESY OF THE U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY

QUADRANGLES INCLUDE: STARKS, LA (1/1/1996).

SITE LOCATION

Waterworks District 14 Maintenance Building Charles Stanley LP & LA Highway 109

Starks, LA

2822 Oneal Ln Bldg B

Baton Rouge, LA 70816-3127

EH165157

DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY, AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION

PURPOSES

Project Manager:

Drawn by:

Checked by: Approved by:

BAR

ACK

SEG

ACK

A-1

6/7/2016

Project No.

File Name: Date:

A-1

Exhibit

1”=2,000’ Scale:

AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY PROVIDED BY GOOGLE EARTH MAPS EXPLORATION PLAN

2822 Oneal Ln Bldg B

Baton Rouge, LA 70816-3127 DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY, AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION

PURPOSES

EH165157

Waterworks District 14 Maintenance Building Charles Stanley LP & LA Highway 109

Starks, LA

Project Manager:

BAR Drawn by:

ACK

SEG

Checked by:

ACK

A-2

6/7/2016

Scale:

Project No.

Approved by: File Name: Date:

AS SHOWN A-2

Exhibit

UC

UC

1.20

1.19

11.1

12.5

17

20

21

22

105

107

25-20-5

46-14-32

32-14-18

32.5+/-

31+/-

15+/-

9+/-

--

3.75 (HP)

2.75 (HP)

2.50 (HP)

2.00 (HP)

2.25 (HP)

1.75 (HP)

1.25 (HP)

0.75 (HP)

0.3

2.0

18.0

24.0

4" TOPSOILSILTY CLAY WITH SAND (CL-ML), brown, medium stiff, with roots

LEAN CLAY (CL), gray and tan, stiff to very stiff

LEAN CLAY (CL), tan and gray, medium stiff to stiff, withsand

Boring Terminated at 24 Feet

GR

AP

HIC

LO

G

Stratification lines are approximate. In-situ, the transition may be gradual.

Starks, LASITE:

Page 1 of 1

Advancement Method:0'-24' continuous flight auger

Abandonment Method:Borings backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion.

2822 Oneal Ln Bldg BBaton Rouge, LA

Notes:

Project No.: EH165157

Drill Rig: DR698

Boring Started: 5/23/2016

BORING LOG NO. B-01Meyer & Associates, Inc.CLIENT:Sulphur, LA

Driller: M. Mckinney

Boring Completed: 5/23/2016

Exhibit: A-3

See Exhibit A-3 for description of field procedures.

See Appendix B for description of laboratoryprocedures and additional data (if any).

See Appendix C for explanation of symbols andabbreviations.Elevation based on Google Earth data

PROJECT: Waterworks Maintenance Bldg

TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T. G

EO

SM

AR

T L

OG

-NO

WE

LL E

H16

5157

.GP

J T

ER

RA

CO

N20

15.G

DT

6/7

/16

TE

ST

TY

PE

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

ST

RE

NG

TH

(tsf

)

ST

RA

IN (

%)

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

LL-PL-PI

ATTERBERGLIMITS

Approximate Surface Elev: 33 (Ft.) +/-

ELEVATION (Ft.)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

DE

PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

20

STRENGTH TEST

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

DEPTH

LOCATION See Exhibit A-2

Latitude: 30.31203° Longitude: -93.66101°

No free water observedWATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS

UC

UC

UC

0.50

0.86

0.70

6

5

8.5

21

20

20

20

100

105

110

20-17-3

60-23-37

43-17-26

32.5+/-

31+/-

29+/-

25+/-

9+/-

0.50 (HP)

2.00 (HP)

1.25 (HP)

0.50 (HP)

2.00 (HP)

2.50 (HP)

2.25 (HP)

1.25 (HP)

2.00 (HP)

0.4

2.0

4.0

8.0

24.0

4" TOPSOILSILT WITH SAND (ML), brown and gray, medium stiff

FAT CLAY (CH), brown and gray, stiff to very stiff, with sand

LEAN CLAY (CL), gray and tan, medium stiff to stiff, withsand

LEAN CLAY (CL), gray and tan, stiff to very stiff

with sand to 24 feet

Boring Terminated at 24 Feet

GR

AP

HIC

LO

G

Stratification lines are approximate. In-situ, the transition may be gradual.

Starks, LASITE:

Page 1 of 1

Advancement Method:0'-24' continuous flight auger

Abandonment Method:Borings backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion.

2822 Oneal Ln Bldg BBaton Rouge, LA

Notes:

Project No.: EH165157

Drill Rig: DR698

Boring Started: 5/23/2016

BORING LOG NO. B-02Meyer & Associates, Inc.CLIENT:Sulphur, LA

Driller: M. Mckinney

Boring Completed: 5/23/2016

Exhibit: A-4

See Exhibit A-3 for description of field procedures.

See Appendix B for description of laboratoryprocedures and additional data (if any).

See Appendix C for explanation of symbols andabbreviations.Elevation based on Google Earth data

PROJECT: Waterworks Maintenance Bldg

TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T. G

EO

SM

AR

T L

OG

-NO

WE

LL E

H16

5157

.GP

J T

ER

RA

CO

N20

15.G

DT

6/7

/16

TE

ST

TY

PE

CO

MP

RE

SS

IVE

ST

RE

NG

TH

(tsf

)

ST

RA

IN (

%)

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

LL-PL-PI

ATTERBERGLIMITS

Approximate Surface Elev: 33 (Ft.) +/-

ELEVATION (Ft.)

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

DE

PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

20

STRENGTH TEST

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

DEPTH

LOCATION See Exhibit A-2

Latitude: 30.31189° Longitude: -93.6611°

No free water observedWATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS

APPENDIX B

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

ackavaleuski

Text Box

Exhibit B-1

Exhibit C-2

Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests A Soil Classification

Group Symbol Group Name B

Coarse Grained Soils: More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve

Gravels: More than 50% of coarse fraction retained on No. 4 sieve

Clean Gravels: Less than 5% fines C

Cu 4 and 1 Cc 3 E GW Well-graded gravel F Cu 4 and/or 1 Cc 3 E GP Poorly graded gravel F

Gravels with Fines: More than 12% fines C

Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F,G,H Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel F,G,H

Sands: 50% or more of coarse fraction passes No. 4 sieve

Clean Sands: Less than 5% fines D

Cu 6 and 1 Cc 3 E SW Well-graded sand I Cu 6 and/or 1 Cc 3 E SP Poorly graded sand I

Sands with Fines: More than 12% fines D

Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G,H,I Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G,H,I

Fine-Grained Soils: 50% or more passes the No. 200 sieve

Silts and Clays: Liquid limit less than 50

Inorganic: PI 7 and plots on or above “A” line J CL Lean clay K,L,M PI 4 or plots below “A” line J ML Silt K,L,M

Organic: Liquid limit - oven dried

0.75 OL Organic clay K,L,M,N

Liquid limit - not dried Organic silt K,L,M,O

Silts and Clays: Liquid limit 50 or more

Inorganic: PI plots on or above “A” line CH Fat clay K,L,M PI plots below “A” line MH Elastic Silt K,L,M

Organic: Liquid limit - oven dried

0.75 OH Organic clay K,L,M,P

Liquid limit - not dried Organic silt K,L,M,Q Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor PT Peat

A Based on the material passing the 3-inch (75-mm) sieve B If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add “with cobbles

or boulders, or both” to group name. C Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded

gravel with silt, GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay, GP-GM poorly graded gravel with silt, GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay.

D Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded sand with silt, SW-SC well-graded sand with clay, SP-SM poorly graded sand with silt, SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay

E Cu = D60/D10 Cc = 6010

2

30

DxD

)(D

F If soil contains 15% sand, add “with sand” to group name. G If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM, or SC-SM.

H If fines are organic, add “with organic fines” to group name. I If soil contains 15% gravel, add “with gravel” to group name. J If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay. K If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add “with sand” or “with gravel,”

whichever is predominant. L If soil contains 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add “sandy” to

group name. M If soil contains 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add

“gravelly” to group name. N PI 4 and plots on or above “A” line. O PI 4 or plots below “A” line. P PI plots on or above “A” line. Q PI plots below “A” line.

UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION

rscavataio

Typewritten Text

rscavataio

Typewritten Text

rscavataio

Typewritten Text

ackavaleuski

Text Box

Exhibit B-2

EXHIBIT SC – 9.03

Referred to under SC – 9.03 of the

Supplementary Conditions

EXHIBIT "SC-9.03”

RPR-1

Duties, Responsibilities and Limitations of Authority

of Resident Project Engineer

___________________________________________________________________________________

ENGINEER shall furnish a Resident Project Representative ("RPR"), assistants and other field staff to assist

ENGINEER in observing progress and quality of the work of Contractor.

Through more extensive on-site observations of the work in progress and field checks of materials and

equipment by the RPR and assistants, ENGINEER shall endeavor to provide further protection for OWNER against

defects and deficiencies in the work of Contractor. However, ENGINEER shall not, during such visits or as a result

of such observations of Contractor's work in progress, supervise, direct, or have control over Contractor's work nor

shall ENGINEER have authority over or responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures

selected by Contractor, for safety precautions and programs incident to the work of Contractor, for any failure of

Contractor to comply with laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes or orders applicable to Contractor's performing

and furnishing the work, or responsibility of construction for Contractor's failure to furnish and perform the Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents. In particular, the specific limitations set forth in paragraph 2.5 of

the Agreement are applicable.

The duties and responsibilities of the RPR are limited to those of ENGINEER in ENGINEER's

agreement with the OWNER and in the construction Contract Documents, and further limited and

described as follows:

A. General

RPR is ENGINEER's agent at the site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of

ENGINEER, and will confer with ENGINEER regarding RPR's actions. RPR's dealings in matters

pertaining to the on-site work shall in general be with ENGINEER and Contractor, keeping OWNER

advised as necessary. RPR's dealings with subcontractors shall only be through or with the full

knowledge and approval of Contractor. RPR shall generally communicate with OWNER with the

knowledge of and under the direction of ENGINEER.

B. Duties and Responsibilities of RPR

1. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing submittals and schedule

of values prepared by Contractor and consult with ENGINEER concerning acceptability.

2. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction

conferences, progress meetings, job conferences and other project-related meetings, and

prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof.

3. Liaison:

a. Serve as ENGINEER's liaison with Contractor, working principally through Contractor's

superintendent and assist in understanding the intent of Contract Documents; and assist

ENGINEER in serving as OWNER's liaison with Contractor when Contractor's

operations affect OWNER's on-site operations.

b. Assist in obtaining from OWNER additional details or information, when required for

proper execution of the Work.

4. Shop Drawings and Samples:

a. Record date of receipt of Shop Drawings and Samples.

EXHIBIT "SC-9.03”

RPR-2

b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the site by Contractor, and notify ENGINEER of

availability of Samples for examination.

c. Advise ENGINEER and Contractor of the commencement of any Work requiring a Shop

Drawing or Sample if the submittal has not been approved by ENGINEER.

5. Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests:

a. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist ENGINEER in

determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract

Documents.

b. Report to ENGINEER whenever RPR believes that any Work will not produce a

completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Document or will prejudice the

integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as

indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the

requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise

ENGINEER of Work that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be

uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval.

c. Verify that tests, equipment and systems start-ups and operating and maintenance training

are conducted in the presence of appropriate personnel, and that Contractor maintains

adequate records thereof; and observe, record and report to ENGINEER appropriate

details relative to the test procedures and start-ups.

d. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction

over the Project, record the results of these inspections and report to ENGINEER.

6. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to ENGINEER when clarifications and

interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to Contractor clarifications

and interpretations as issued by ENGINEER.

7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor's suggestions for modifications in Drawings

or Specifications and report with RPR's recommendations to ENGINEER. Transmit to

Contractor in writing decisions as issued by ENGINEER.

8. Records:

a. Maintain at the job site orderly files for correspondence, reports of job conferences, Shop

Drawings and Samples, reproductions of original Contract Documents including all Work

Change Directives, Addenda, Change Orders, Field Orders, additional Drawings issued

subsequent to the execution of the Contract, ENGINEER's clarifications and

interpretations of the Contract Documents, progress reports, Shop Drawing submittals

received from and delivered to Contractor and other Project related documents.

b. Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, recording Contractor's hours on the job

site, weather conditions, data relative to questions of Work Change Directives, Change

Orders or changed conditions, list of job site visitors, daily activities, decisions,

observations in general, and specific observations in more detail as in the case of

observing test procedures, and send copies to ENGINEER.

c. Record names, addresses and telephone numbers of all Contractors, subcontractors and

major suppliers of materials and equipment.

EXHIBIT "SC-9.03”

RPR-3

9. Reports:

a. Furnish to ENGINEER periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and of

Contractor's compliance with the progress schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing and

Sample submittals.

b. Consult with ENGINEER in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of

important phases of the Work.

c. Draft proposed Change Orders and Work Change Directives, obtaining backup material

from Contractor and recommend to ENGINEER Change Orders, Work Change

Directives, and Field Orders.

d. Report immediately to ENGINEER and OWNER the occurrence of any accident.

10. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor for compliance with the

established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to ENGINEER,

notice particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the schedule of values. Work

completed and materials and equipment delivered at the site but not incorporated in the Work.

11. Certificates, Maintenance and Operation Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that

certificates, maintenance and operation manuals and other data required to be assembled and

furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the

Contract Documents, and have this material delivered to ENGINEER for review and

forwarding to OWNER prior to final payment for the Work.

12. Completion:

a. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit to Contractor a

list of observed items requiring completion or correction.

b. Observe whether Contractor has had performed inspections required by laws, rules,

regulations, ordinances, codes, or orders applicable to the work, including but not limited

to those to be performed by public agencies having jurisdiction over the work.

c. Conduct a final inspection in the company of ENGINEER, OWNER and Contractor and

prepare a final list of items to be completed or corrected.

d. Observe whether all items on final list have been completed or corrected and make

recommendations to ENGINEER concerning acceptance and issuance of the Notice of

Acceptability of the Work.

C. Limitations of Authority by RPR

Resident Project Representative:

1. Shall not authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or

equipment (including "or-equal" items), unless authorized by ENGINEER.

2. Shall not exceed limitations of ENGINEER's authority as set forth in the Agreement or the

Contract Documents.

EXHIBIT "SC-9.03”

RPR-4

3. Shall not undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or

Contractor's superintendent.

4. Shall not advise on, issue directions relative to or assume control over any aspect of the means,

methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction unless such advice or directions

are specifically required by the Contract Documents.

5. Shall not advise on, issue directions regarding or assume control over safety precautions and

programs in connection with the Work.

6. Shall not accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than Contractor.

7. Shall not authorize OWNER to occupy the Project in whole or in part.

8. Shall not participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted by others

except as specifically authorized by ENGINEER.

[Note: If the work designed or specified by ENGINEER is to be provided or performed under

more than one prime contract or the times of performance are to be staggered, the provisions of

this Exhibit should be amended or supplemented as required.]

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000-1

SECTION 01 10 00

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

1.01 OWNER

Waterworks District 14 of Ward 5, Parish of Calcasieu P.O. Box 37 Starks, LA 70661 Phone No. 337-743-5300 Contact Person: George Miller, President

1.02 ENGINEER

Meyer & Associates, Inc. 600 Cities Service Highway Sulphur, Louisiana 70663 Phone No. (337) 625-8353 Contact Person: Mark McCarty

1.03 PROJECT TITLE:

Office Building M.A. Project No. H1-18091-DA

1.04 SCOPE

Contract work includes furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, supervision, tools and other necessary items for the complete and satisfactory construction of a pre-engineering metal building, parking, and associated facilities.

PART 2 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

2.01 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS INTENT

The Drawings are described previously in the Supplementary Conditions and do not purport to show all the details of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and Contract Documents are intended to describe a functionally complete project, any work that may reasonably be inferred as being required to produce the intended result is to be supplied by the Contractor even though not specifically called for in the Contract Documents (either the Drawings or Specifications). The Engineer shall issue clarifications and interpretations, which may include supplemental Drawings and Specifications, in accordance with the provisions of General Conditions Article 3, 9, and other applicable provisions.

2.02 CONTRACT QUANTITY CHANGES

The Owner shall have the right to increase or decrease the amount of work at any time or times provided that the total increase or decrease does not exceed thirty percent (30%) of the original

011000-2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

total Contract price shown in the Agreement. The total increase or decrease may be applied to one or any number of items, or any item or items may be completely eliminated. No allowance will be made for any supposed or real loss of anticipated profits on account of such increase or decrease. Contractor is advised to balance the Bid carefully.

2.03 MATERIALS STORAGE

All material shall be stored in strict accordance with the manufacturer instructions.

The Contractor shall provide a fenced storage site capable of storage of all material ordered if the Contractor is requesting payment for materials stockpiled. Payment for stockpiled materials will only be made for materials stored on-site as approved and accepted by the Engineer. Material invoices must be provided.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all material through the warranty period and beyond as provided by this contract and applicable law and may desire to retain a certain amount from the Vendor supplying the materials.

2.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS

The Louisiana Department of Transportation & Development Specifications for Roads and Bridges, 2006 Edition Part Nos. 2 thru 10 are hereby designated to be the reference specifications and are made a part of these contract documents by reference.

The Technical Specifications contained herein only highlight and supplement certain areas of the reference Specifications; therefore, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to thoroughly familiarize himself with the referenced specifications. In case of conflict the Technical Specifications contained herein will govern.

2.05 PROCEDURES FOR SHOP DRAWINGS

As a supplement to the General Conditions, the following also applies to the shop drawings and their submittal procedure.

To meet the qualifications necessary to ensure approval of a submittal as a Shop Drawing, the submittal must:

A. Include drawings of the item in a sufficiently large scale so as to provide clarity to allow adequate evaluation of the complete product as it is proposed to be furnished at the job site.

B. Include specifications and descriptions of the item as it is proposed to be furnished at the job site.

C. Include drawings of the item showing the physical dimensions of the item, the clearances necessary to install the item.

D. Include drawings and specifications showing materials of construction, their strengths, the surface preparation, and paint used upon them. The specific grade of surface


preparation shall be specified if it differs from the requirements called for in the Technical Provisions.

E. Include copies of sample warranties on each item of equipment.

F. Include specifications describing operation and maintenance requirements for the item.

G. Include drawings and specifications of special equipment needed for proper installation of the item and whether or not these items are to be furnished by the Supplier/Vendor. A complete set of field assembly and installation instructions for the installation contractor shall be provided as a part of the Certified Shop Drawings.

The Contractor shall submit six (6) copies each of the shop drawings submittal on respective materials, certified and stamped. Uncertified or unstamped submittals may be treated as being incomplete. All submittals must be accompanied with written letter of transmittal signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. Submittal from other parties will not be accepted. Incomplete submittals will be returned as incomplete with no action taken.

2.06 CLARIFICATION OF ONE YEAR CORRECTION PERIOD

Provisions of General Conditions are not intended to waive the Contractor's obligation to perform the Work as Specified after the elapsing of the twelve month period. Work which is required by these documents as amended (if applicable) but is found:

1) not to have been performed

2) not to have been performed per Specifications

must be corrected as provided in the General Conditions irrespective of the twelve month period as provided by applicable law.

2.07 CLARIFICATION OF WARRANTIES ON MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

All warranties are between the Contractor and Owner. Additional manufacturer's warranties may be specifically required herein and definitely should be required by the Contractor. The initiation of the Contractor's warranty is as defined in the General Conditions Section 6.19 irrespective of any third party's limitation to the Contractor.

2.08 TIME CONSTRAINTS

By submitting a proposal the contractor is certifying that he understands the required time constraints on the construction period of this contract and has incorporated the level of effort required to complete all specified work within the required time frame.

The contract time can be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. In computing extensions due to abnormal weather conditions, the following chart will be used to determine normal anticipated days loss due to rain:

January 11 May 5 September 4

February 10 June 6 October 3


March 8 July 6 November 5

April 7 August 5 December 8

Days in excess of the above on a cumulative basis shall be considered "abnormal" per the General Conditions.

2.09 ASSIGNMENT AND CONTRACT CHANGES

In exercising any contract provisions for assignments and other contract changes, the Owner shall not be required to notify the surety or sureties on the Contractor's bond or bonds. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to advise the surety or sureties of any changes or assignments, and the progress of his work.

2.10 SURETIES PROVISIONS

Sureties shall meet all specified qualifications in the Contract Documents. Nothing in these documents shall in any way indicate or incur a responsibility of the Owner or Engineer to safeguard the surety's financial interest relative to this work.

2.11 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

The procedure for securing the status of "substantially complete" shall be as defined in the General Conditions as modified in this section. Minimum requirements to be met prior to the Work being substantially complete include:

1) All pay item work complete.

2) Record drawings submitted to the Engineer.

2.11.1 Equipment Start-up

All equipment shall be given an initial startup under the manufacturer's representative as specified. This start-up by itself does not constitute the commencement of any warranty or operational period.

2.11.2 Operational Period

The Contractor, as part of the work, shall start up the facility. Requirements relating to specific equipment appear elsewhere in these specifications.

Generally, the Contractor must have all equipment and controls, capable of full operation prior to performing a facility start up. Partial startups pertaining to isolated equipment shall not constitute a facility start-up.

An Operation Inspection of the project will be required before the facility start up. Therefore, when the work is sufficiently complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing and request an operational inspection. The notification shall include a list of items remaining to be completed or corrected.


Within ten (10) working days after the notification, the Engineer will inspect the work and verify the list of items remaining to be completed or corrected.

If the Engineer does not concur that the work is sufficiently complete, he will notify the Contractor in writing and state his reasons. Upon Engineer's concurrence that the work is sufficiently complete, the Contractor shall start up the facility.

After successfully starting the station up and demonstrating it to the Owner and Engineer, the Contractor shall operate and maintain the facility for a period of ten (10) consecutive days. These days shall run without interruption due to failures associated with the new equipment. If failures occur, they shall be promptly remedied and the facility put back on line. The ten (10) days period will then begin anew.

Upon completion of the ten (10) day operational period, the Contractor may turn the daily maintenance of the facility over to the Owner, under the Contractor's supervision. This will not begin any warranty under this contract. At this time, with Owner's concurrence, the Contractor may demolish/abandon, as specified elsewhere, any existing facility to be abandoned which has been replaced by the newly started facility.

At the time that the operation of the station is turned over to the Owner, the Owner will begin paying for electrical power and lubricants and other daily maintenance items.

2.11.3 Work Status

Prior to requesting a substantial completion, all pay item work shall be completed. Minor corrective work shall be acceptable to remain undone.

2.11.4 Inspection for Substantial Completion

As a supplement to the General Conditions, an inspection for substantial completion is required.

After completion or correction of all items noted during the operational inspection (including subsequent deficiencies discovered) and completion of stated prerequisites, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing that the work is substantially complete and request an inspection for issuance of substantial completion certificate.

The Contractor shall request the inspection in writing to the Engineer.

The Contractor shall submit the following items to the Engineer when requesting the inspection: (1) manufacturer's inspection reports when required in the Technical Specifications; (2) certificate of inspection indicating compliance with the laws, ordinances, codes and regulations of Federal, State and local governmental agencies; and (3) a certificate that the Contractor has carefully inspected the work and found it to be entirely complete and in full compliance with the Contract Documents.

Within ten (10) working days after the substantial completion notification, the Engineer will inspect the work for verification.

Upon substantial completion of the work, the Engineer will issue the Contractor a "Certificate of Substantial Completion". This certificate shall be executed by the Owner, the Engineer, and the


Contractor. This certificate may enumerate any conditions to be met by the Contractor for final acceptance of the work by the Engineer.

Once executed by all parties, the Contractor shall have the document recorded by the Clerk of Court in the parish where the work is located. Failure to have the certificate recorded promptly may delay payment of the retainage. After 45 days from the record date of the Certificate of Final Acceptance, the Contractor shall obtain from the Clerk of Court a certified lien certificate on his contract. If the contract is found to be free of liens, the final payment of retainage will be processed upon receipt of the lien free certificate and a request for payment of the retainage from the Contractor, subject to the provisions of Article 14 in the General Conditions.

2.12 USE OF “OR-EQUAL” EQUIPMENT

Contractor is referred to Section 6.05 - Substitute and “Or-Equal” Items of the General Conditions. The drawings are based upon specific equipment from specific manufacturers. Alternate equipment may be approved for use in accordance with Section 6.05 of the General Conditions, but the Contractor will be responsible for the coordination with other portions of the work that will need to be altered to accommodate the alternate equipment.

PART 3 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS

3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

Prior to beginning construction, a pre-construction conference will be held between the Contractor(s), the Owner, and the Consulting Engineers to reach agreements relating to responsibilities and procedures of each interested party to see that the project is installed according to the approved plans and specifications and the conditions under which disbursements for construction costs are authorized and will be paid. This meeting will be prearranged by the Owner.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Prior to the Preconstruction Conference, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a proposed progress schedule in the form of a bar chart showing:

1. Appropriate items of work.

2. The percent of total work for each item of work.

3. Time of beginning and time of completion of each item by calendar period.

4. Other data pertinent to each item (such as total quantity of each, etc.)

5. The bar chart shall be arranged so that actual progress of the work can be charted beside proposed schedule of work for each item.

The form and arrangement of the progress schedule shall be as approved by the Engineer. The breakdown of the work into various items shall be as approved by the Engineer.


The bar chart progress schedule shall be updated monthly by the contractor to show actual work progress and submitted to the Engineer in quadruplicate, monthly.

When monthly requests for payment are made, the progress schedule shall be attached to the payment request. No requests for payment will be approved unless the monthly submittals are completed.

3.03 PROJECT FIELD OFFICE

A project field office for use by others is not required.

3.04 PRECONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION

The Contractor is responsible for documenting the condition of property and facilities adjacent to the work prior to construction. Contractor shall video tape and photograph the project area and provide copies of documentation to Engineer. In the event of damage claims to adjacent improvements the submitted documentation will be used for an initial interpretation of events.

3.05 PROJECT SIGN

A project sign is not required.

PART 4 – GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

4.01 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

The Contractor shall at all times maintain all streets, trenches, driveways, walkways and ditches in such condition as to minimize inconvenience to the property owners. Operations shall be so conducted as to cause minimum interference with access to the property on the streets under construction. Adequate barricades, warning signs and lights shall be maintained at all times.

4.02 EXISTING DRIVEWAYS & DRIVEWAY CULVERTS

Under this contract, construction work may be required for driveways to be excavated, utilized as excavation storage area, etc. Irrespective of the construction use, under all circumstances the Contractor shall restore the surface of the driveway to its original condition including any necessary removal and replacement of existing driveway culverts. The Contractor shall replace existing culverts at no separate pay; he must include the cost of this work in other items.

4.03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WATER FACILITIES

There shall be no physical connection between a public or private potable water supply system and a sewer, or appurtenance thereto which would permit the passage of any sewage or polluted water into the potable supply.

Sewer and water mains shall be laid in separate trenches not less than 6 ft. apart horizontally, when installed in parallel. Crossing water and sewer mains shall have a minimum vertical separation of 18 in. In cases where it is not possible to maintain a minimum 6 ft. horizontal separation, the State Health Officer may allow a waiver of this requirement on a case by case basis if supported by data from the design engineer.


4.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

The Contractor shall provide and pay for all temporary utilities such as electricity and water necessary to test and complete his various items. Should more than one contractor be involved in a project, the contractors shall coordinate with each other for the necessary utilities.

The Owner will pay for any permanent utility meter deposits; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for any utility bills incurred until the facility is turned over to the Owner for use.

4.05 PROTECTION OF THE SITE

The Contractor shall protect adjacent utilities, equipment, driveways, fences, cargo, automobiles, etc. The Contractor shall replace or compensate the Owner, for any damage he causes to physical property.

4.06 EXISTING UTILITIES

The Work may be located in the vicinity of existing gas, telephone, sewer, water and/or electric lines, and the Contractor shall handle his work in a manner so as not to damage the existing utilities. He shall repair or pay for any repairs for damages done to existing utilities.

4.07 PHOTOGRAPHS

Contractor shall take photographs indicating the state of progress on a monthly basis. These photographs shall be mounted on 8-1/2" x 11", dated, identified and submitted as an attachment to the monthly request for payment.

4.08 SAFETY FENCING

Safety fencing is required around the perimeter of unattended stationary excavations. Stationary excavations are those construction excavations intended to remain open in excess of 4 hours (such as boring entrance and exit pits).

Safety fencing may be a flexible fabric such as geo grid soil reinforcement, etc. Delineating ribbon or surveying tape will not satisfy this requirement. There is no separate pay for this work.

4.09 LAND FOR RIGHT-OF-WAYS AND EASEMENTS

The lands, right-of-ways and easements for the work shall be furnished by the Owner as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for working within these limits. If the Contractor requires additional land for construction outside these limits, he will be solely responsible for acquiring the same.

The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his construction activities through the Owner and/or Engineer to ensure that all improvements are placed in the proper location.


4.10 PROCEDURE FOR RECORD DRAWING

As a supplement to General Conditions Section 6.19 requirement of the Contractor to maintain record drawings, the Contractor shall maintain and provide the Engineer with record documents as specified herein.

1. Maintenance of Documents

A. Maintain in Contractor's field office in clean, dry legible condition the following:

(1) Contract Drawings

(2) Specifications

(3) Addenda

(4) Approved Shop Drawings

(5) Change Orders

(6) Other modifications of Contract, Test Records, Survey Data, Field Orders, and

(7) All other documents pertinent to Contractor's work.

B. Provide files and racks for proper storage and easy access.

C. Make documents available at all times for inspection by the Engineer and the Owner.

D. Record documents shall not be used for any other purpose and shall not be removed from the office without the Engineer's approval.

2. Marking System

A. Use colored pencils for marking changes, revisions, additions, deletions, etc., to the record set of Contract Drawings.

3. Recording

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in two inch (2ʺ) high printed letters.

B. Keep record documents current.

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

D. Contract Drawing - Legibly mark to record actual construction including:

(1) Depths of various elements in relation to datum.

(2) Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements.


(3) Location of internal appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.

(4) Field changes of dimension and detail.

(5) Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.

(6) Details not on original Contract Drawings.

E. Specifications and Addenda - Legibly mark up each Section to record:

(1) Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.

(2) Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.

(3) Other matters not originally specified.

F. Shop Drawings - Maintain as record documents and legibly annotate drawings to record changes made after review.

4. Submittal

A. At completion of project, deliver record documents to the Engineer.

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter containing:

(1) Date;

(2) Project title and number;

(3) Contractor's name and address;

(4) Title and number of each record document;

(5) Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate; and

(6) Signature of Contractor, or his authorized representative.

5. Part of Other Work

Record drawings are considered a part of the related work and as such payment for work may be denied or reduced appropriately should the record drawings not be current during any periodic pay estimate period.

4.11 FINAL CLEAN-UP

The Contractor will be responsible for cleanup of the work specifically including removal of construction materials and debris; backfilling of trenches, depressions and ruts resulting from the work and general site grading and dress up to restore to the original condition.


The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the overall Final Project Cleanup, including removal of all construction debris and material, final project grading and dress-up, seeding, etc. It is the intent of the final cleanup requirement that all areas subjected to construction will be fine graded and dressed so that they can be easily mowed with a push type residential mower and not pond water.

4.12 PERMITS

The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a building permit. The Contractor will be responsible for coordinating and scheduling all required inspections. A permit fee will not be charged.

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 033100-1

Section 03 31 00

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes furnishing, placing, finishing and curing Portland cement concrete in structures in accordance with these specifications and conforming to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit for approval his intended source of materials and the mix design for concrete he proposed to furnish. No work shall be started until the Mix Design has been approved by the Engineer. The Mix Design submittal shall include complete information on suppliers, sources, and applicable characteristics of aggregates, cement, mixing water, any proposed admixtures, complete mix proportions, etc. The mix design shall be accompanied by test reports verifying the strength(s) of submitted mix(es).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All concrete placed as part of this Contract shall be in conformance with this section unless expressly noted otherwise in these Drawings and Specifications. All structural concrete for foundations, boxes, manholes, etc. shall be Class A, 4,000 psi 28 day compressive strength unless noted otherwise.

2.2 CONCRETE SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Classes as called for on the Drawings or specified elsewhere shall conform to the following:

Class

Required 28 Day Compres-sive Strength

Min. Cement Content

Maximum Wa-ter/ Cement

Ratio

Slump

Vibrated Non Vibrated

(psi) 94 lb sk/cy lb./lb. (in.) (in.)

A B C D E

4,000 3,500 3,000 2,500 2,000

6 5-1/2

5 4-1/2

4

0.53 0.58 0.58 0.62 0.70

2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 1-3

2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5

B. Cement contents are minimum values. Adjustments from this table necessary due to aggregate requirements, admixtures, etc., shall not result in a cement decrease nor result in any increase in

033100-2 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

compensation to the Contractor. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the Contractor may substitute a maximum of 15% fly ash (by weight) for the cement required in the previous table.

2.3 CEMENT

A. Cement shall comply with the Standard Specifications for Portland cement, Type I ASTM Designation C-150, unless otherwise indicated. Pozzolan blended cement shall not be used.

2.4 AGGREGATES

A. Concrete aggregates shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates, ASTM Designation C-33, except that aggregates failing to meet these specifications, but which have been shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of the required quality, may be used where approved by Engineer.

B. Aggregate, both fine and coarse, shall be so stored as to avoid the inclusion of foreign materials. Fine aggregate and coarse aggregate shall be stored in separate piles. Division bulkheads shall be used, if necessary, in order to prevent adjacent piles from overlapping. All aggregates shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent size segregation. When segregation is apparent, the aggregate shall be re-mixed. At the time of its use, the aggregate shall be free of frozen materials.

C. Aggregates shall be limited in size to the smaller of:

1. 1-1/2ʺ 2. One-sixth (1/6) of clear distance between forms for reinforced concrete. 3. One-fifth (1/5) of clear distance between forms for non-reinforced concrete. 4. Three-fourths (3/4) of the smallest clear spacing between reinforcement and other

objects (e.g. other reinforcement, forms, etc.).

2.5 WATER

A. Water shall be potable.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Except for admixture(s) which are specifically required in these specifications, any proposed admixture(s) shall be approved in writing, by the Engineer, prior to construction. Reductions in cement content will not be permitted. Admixtures containing chloride ions, or other ions having a harmful effect, shall not be used where concrete is in contact with aluminum or zinc-coatings, where concrete is to be sulfate-resistant, or where concrete will be prestressed. Any admixture must conform to the following requirements:

1. Air-Entraining Admixture - ASTM C-260, C-226, C-150. Unless specified otherwise on the drawings, provide an air entraining admixture to achieve an air content of 5% +/- 1% by volume.

2. Accelerating Agent - Calcium chloride conforming to ASTM D 98, Type 1 or Type 2. Use and amount shall be subject to approval.


3. Other Admixture - Admixture other than air-entraining agent and accelerating agent shall conform to ASTM C494 and shall be compatible with the mix at job temperatures.

B. Admixtures shall be protected from freezing, settling and dampness. Deteriorated materials shall not be utilized.

2.7 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Various reinforcing systems as shown in the Drawings shall conform to the following and other sections of these specifications, as applicable.

1. Bars - Reinforcing steel bars shall be of the size specified conforming to ASTM A 615 (Billet-Steel deformed) or ASTM A 617 (Axle steel deformed). Bars shall be deformed and be Grade 60.

2. Welded Wire Fabric - Mesh reinforcement shall meet ASTM Designation A 185. Size shall be as shown and called for on Drawings.

3. Tie-Bars - Tie bars shall conform to identical standards of the reinforcement bars (i.e. ASTM A 615, A 617, Grade 60).

B. Reinforcement shall be free of loose, flaky rust, mill scale, or coating, including ice, and any other foreign substance interfering with the bond.

2.8 WATERSTOP

A. All waterstop shall be PVC and meet Corps of Engineers specifications CRD C572 and USDA, 565 Specification 140. Splices shall be thermally welded. Waterstop shall be ribbed dumbbell type of the size specified.

2.9 FORMS

A. Forms shall be of wood or other approved material, built mortar tight and of sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion due to pressure of concrete and other loads incident to construction operations. Forms shall be constructed and maintained to prevent warping and opening of joints due to shrinkage of lumber.

B. Forms shall be substantial and unyielding and so designed that finished concrete will conform to proper dimensions and contours. Design of forms shall take into account the effect of vibration of concrete as it is placed.

C. Forms for exposed surfaces shall not adhere to or discolor concrete, shall be made of either moisture resistant concrete form plywood, dressed lumber, or metal lined with concrete form plywood. Forms shall be approved by the Engineer. Forms for reentrant angles shall be chamfered and forms shall be filleted at sharp corners. Forms for projections, such as girders or copings, shall be given a bevel or draft to ensure easy removal. Chamfer strips shall be mill cut, triangular, dressed on all faces, and shall be 3/4" (measured on the sides) unless directed otherwise. All exposed edges shall be chamfered unless expressly noted otherwise in these Drawings and Specifications.


D. When possible, forms shall be daylighted at intervals not greater than 10 feet vertically, the openings being sufficient to permit free access for inspecting, working and spading the concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Full coordination with other trades shall be provided by the Contractor to assure proper setting and provisions for embedded items. Embedded items shall have been inspected and tested as applicable prior to concrete placement.

3.2 SETTING FORMS

A. Forms shall be set and maintained reasonably true to required line and grade until concrete is sufficiently hardened. When forms appear to be unsatisfactory, either before or during placing of concrete, the work shall be stopped until defects have been corrected. Forms shall be so designed that portions without disturbing portions of forms to be removed later and, as far as practicable, so that form marks will conform to general lines of the structures. For narrow walls and columns, the bottom shall be left loose so that they may be removed for cleaning out extraneous material immediately before placing concrete.

B. Metal ties or anchorages within forms shall be constructed to permit their removal to a depth of at least one inch from the face without damage to concrete. If ordinary wire ties are permitted, upon removal of the forms, wires shall be cut back at least 1/4 inch from the face of concrete with chisels or nippers; only nippers shall be used for green concrete. Fittings for metal ties shall be of such design that, upon their removal, cavities left will be of the smallest possible size. Cavities shall be filled with cement mortar and the surface left sound, smooth, even and uniform in color.

C. Forms shall be treated with a form release agent and saturated with water immediately before placing concrete. Release agents which will adhere to or discolor concrete shall not be used. Prior to placing concrete, the interior of forms shall be cleaned of dirt, sawdust shavings or other debris. Forms shall be inspected immediately prior to placing concrete.

D. Cleaned ports shall be provided to the top surface of concrete where a stoppage of placing occurs.

3.3 PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING & EMBEDS

A. Reinforcement detailing and placement, including concrete protection for steel reinforcement, shall conform to ACI 318 and 315 unless noted otherwise.

B. Steel shall be fabricated and placed as indicated with alignment true with the Drawings. Reinforcing steel shall not be aligned in a manner injurious to the steel or concrete. Heating to bend or straighten bars shall require prior approval. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, the resulting arrangement of bars including additional bars necessary to meet structural requirements shall be approved by the Engineer before concrete is placed.


C. Reinforcing steel shall not be spliced at points of maximum stress unless otherwise indicated. Laps or splices shall be made in conformance with ACI 318. Tie bars shall be accurately aligned parallel to the finished surface and shall be rigidly held in place and supported during placing of the concrete. Exposed reinforcement bars, inserts, and plates intended for bonding with future extensions shall be protected from corrosion and inspected and cleaned prior to placement of concrete.

D. Miscellaneous embedded items not specifically mentioned herein but which are indicated on the plans or are required for a complete job shall be provided and installed. Positive methods shall be used in placing the inserts and embedded items to keep them in correct position during placing of concrete.

3.4 EXPANSION & FIXED JOINTS

A. Open Joints: Open joints shall be constructed by insertion and subsequent removal of a wood strip, metal plate or other approved material. Insertion and removal of the template shall be accomplished without chipping or breaking corners of concrete. Reinforcement shall not extend across an open joint.

B. Filled Joints: Joints to be sealed with poured or preformed compression seals shall be formed and constructed similar to open joints. For joints with preformed filler, the filler shall be in correct position when concrete is placed.

C. Premolded Expansion Joint Filler: Premolded fillers shall be furnished when specified and installed as directed. Material for expansion joints shall be asphalt impregnated fiber board, sealed with bitumastic joint sealer, unless noted otherwise.

D. Steel Joints: Plates, angles or other structural shapes shall be accurately fabricated to conform to the section of the concrete floor. Care shall be taken to ensure that the surface in the finished plane is true and free of warping. Positive methods shall be employed in placing joints to keep them in correct position during placing of concrete. The opening at expansion joints shall be taken to avoid impairment of the required clearance by accurately setting the joint considering temperature effects and stage of construction at the time of installation.

E. Temporary restraints placed in joints shall be removed as soon as possible after casting adjacent pours.

3.5 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Construction joints shall be made only where located on the Drawings or shown on the pouring schedule, as approved by the Engineer. If not detailed on the Drawings, construction joints shall be placed as directed. Raised shear keys or reinforcing steel shall be used where necessary to transmit shear or bond sections together. Horizontal beams shall not connect to a wall, column or beam by a joint in shear.

B. Forms shall be retightened before placing new concrete on or against hardened concrete.

C. For mortar joints, the surface of hardened concrete shall be roughened as required in a manner that will not leave loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface, thoroughly


cleaned of foreign matter and laitance, and saturated with water. To ensure an excess of mortar at the juncture of hardened and newly deposited concrete, the surfaces, including vertical and inclined surfaces, shall be thoroughly coated with mortar or neat cement grout. New concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained its initial set. Placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to joint. Edges of joints which are exposed to view shall be finished true to line and elevation.

D. For epoxy joints, vertical surfaces of deck construction joints and other construction joints shall be coated prior to each succeeding pour with an approved epoxy adhesive applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. Surfaces of hardened concrete to which new concrete is to be bonded shall be cleaned of foreign material and loose and unsound concrete by sandblasting, hammers or wire brushes.

E. Grease or oil present shall be removed with a detergent wash such as trisodium phosphate and the entire area washed with fresh water and brushed with a stiff brush. If a detergent is not required, dust and small particles not removed by other cleaning methods shall be removed by washing.

3.6 MIXING

A. The concrete shall be mixed until there is uniform distribution of the materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged.

B. For job-mixed concrete, the mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer and mixing shall be continued at least one minute and 30 seconds after all materials are in the mixer.

C. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the requirements set forth in the Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete, ASTM Designation C-94. The following time intervals between mixing and placing apply:

1. Stationary Mixers - Non agitating Transport 45 minutes 2. Truck Mixed - Agitating Transport 60 minutes or 45 minutes

when temperature exceeds 80○ F 3. Site Mixed (Site concrete placement) 90 minutes

3.7 HANDLING & PLACING CONCRETE

A. In preparation for placing concrete, all sawdust, chips and other construction debris, water, and extraneous matter shall be removed from the interior of forms. Struts, stays and braces serving temporarily to hold forms in concrete shall be removed from the forms when concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. Placing concrete shall not be permitted when weather or Contractor's facility limitations prevent proper concrete finishing or curing.

B. Concrete shall be placed as to avoid segregation of materials and displacement of reinforcement. The use of long troughs, chutes, and pipes for conveying concrete from mixer to forms will be permitted only with written authorization. If inferior concrete is produced by the use of such


devices, the Engineer may order discontinuance of their use and the institution of a satisfactory method of placing.

C. Unless otherwise permitted, open troughs and chutes shall be metal or metal-lined. Where steep slopes are required, chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement of concrete.

D. Chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept free from coatings of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each pour. Water for flushing shall not be discharged within the structures. No aluminum alloy material will be allowed.

E. When placing operations involve dropping concrete more than 5 feet, it shall be deposited through sheet metal or other approved tremie except where deemed impractical by the Engineer. After initial set of the concrete, forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be placed on the ends of reinforcement bars which project from freshly poured concrete.

F. Concrete, when placed, shall have a temperature of not less than 50○F nor more than 100○F, nor shall it be placed with a freeze predicted within 24 hours.

G. Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly consolidated. Consolidation shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to the following provisions:

1. Vibration shall be internal unless authorization for other methods is obtained or as provided herein.

2. Vibrators shall be of an approved type and design, capable of transmitting vibration to concrete at frequencies of not less than 7,000 impulses per minute.

3. Intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect concrete over a radius of at least 18 inches.

4. The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly consolidate each concrete batch immediately after it is placed. Spare units shall be on site and immediately available for use.

5. Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement and imbedded fixtures and into corners and angles of forms.

6. Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited concrete. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. Vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly compact concrete but shall not be continued so as to cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the extent that localized areas of grout are formed. Depth of vibration should extend into the underlying layer of fresh concrete to weld the two stratums.

7. Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not farther apart than twice the radius over which vibration is visibly effective. Vibration shall not be applied directly to or through reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete which have hardened to the degree that concrete ceases to be plastic under the vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in forms. Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as necessary to ensure smooth surfaces and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners and locations inaccessible to vibrators.


8. These provisions for vibration shall apply to filler concrete for steel grid floor except that the vibrator shall be applied to the steel.

9. These provisions for vibration shall also apply to precast piling, concrete cribbing and other precast members except that, if approved, the manufacturer's methods of vibration may be used.

H. Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches thick unless otherwise permitted. When less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it shall be terminated at a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be placed and consolidated before the preceding batch has taken initial set to prevent damage to green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation between batches.

I. When placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete, after becoming firm enough to retain its form, shall be cleaned of laitance and other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. The top surface of concrete adjacent to forms shall be finished to a 2-inch grade strip.

J. Where a featheredge might be produced at a construction joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wingwall, an inset form work shall be used to produce a blocked out portion in the preceding layer which shall produce an edge thickness of not less than 6 inches in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within 18 inches of the top of any face, unless provision has been made for a coping less than 18 inches thick, in which case, if permitted, the construction joint may be made at the underside of the coping.

K. Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete, accumulations of mortar splashed on reinforcement steel and form shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be mixed in fresh concrete. If accumulations are not removed prior to the concrete reaching initial set, care shall be exercised not to damage or break the concrete-steel bond while cleaning reinforcement steel.

L. Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for each span unless otherwise directed.

3.8 PUMPING

A. Pumping equipment shall be so arranged that no vibrations result which damage freshly placed concrete. Pipes carrying concrete to placing area shall be laid out with a minimum of bends and not unauthorized change in size. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure, suitable equipment of adequate capacity shall be used. Aluminum piping will not be permitted.

B. A grout mortar, or concrete with coarse aggregate omitted, shall be pumped through the equipment ahead of the regular concrete to provide lubrication to start pumping operations. This material shall not be used in placement. The lubrication process need not be repeated as long as pumping operations are continuous.

C. Operation of the pump shall be such as to provide a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets. When pumping is completed, concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall


be ejected in such manner that there will be no contamination of concrete or separation of ingredients.

D. Contractor must submit a written plan of operation prior to being allowed to pump concrete. This plan must indicate provisions to prevent formation of cold joints in the event of a disruption in conveying concrete.

3.9 TESTING

A. Laboratory services shall be performed by a commercial laboratory selected by the Engineer, approved by the Owner, and paid by the Owner. Contractor and/or supplier shall give the Owner full access to placement site and production site for purpose of quality control. The laboratory shall be allowed to inspect and test all materials entering concrete, analyze aggregate for quality, durability, grading and free water content, take representative specimens of ingredients and mixes, and make test cylinders and measure compressive strength of same. Provisions shall be made to have batch plant and job site access for laboratory control. Job site laboratory control shall include job mixing, handling and placing of concrete.

B. All test specimens shall be taken and laboratory tests conducted in conformance with the latest standard test procedure of the ASTM. Above described tests are for the Owner's benefit, not intended for reliance on by the Contractor. Contractor is responsible for his own quality assurance.

C. Unless otherwise required, a minimum of five (5) 6 inch by 12 inch cylinders will be made for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or for each day's pour, if the amount poured in a day is less than 50 cubic yards. Of each set of test cylinders, one (1) will be tested for compressive strength at the age of three (3) days; two (2) will be tested for compressive strength at the age of seven (7) days; and two (2) will be tested at the age of twenty-eight (28) days.

D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to produce concrete of the strength, durability, workability, and finish specified, furnish the mix design, furnish representative material for specimens in quantities required by the testing laboratory; cooperate and assist in taking samples of materials for testing. Failure to produce the specified product may result in the product's complete removal and replacement at the Contractor's expense. Any tests taken at the Contractor's request shall be at his expense, regardless of test results.

3.10 CURING

A. A curing period shall be provided as indicated below during which time the concrete shall be protected from moisture loss, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury and injury from water:

1. Cement Type III, IIIA 3 days curing 2. Cement Type I, IA, II, IIA 7 days curing 3. Cement Type IS, IS-A, S, SA, N,

and Pozzolan Blends 10 days curing

B. Impervious membrane curing compounds shall not be permitted in tanks, sumps, pits, boxes, manholes, etc. which may contain raw, process, potable or waste water unless expressly approved for such use by applicable health and environmental codes, laws, regulations, or ordinances.


C. Moist Curing - Unformed surfaces shall be covered with burlap or mats, wetted before placing, and overlapped at least 6 inches. Burlap or mats shall be kept continually wet and in intimate contact with the surface. Where formed surfaces are cured in the forms, the forms and exposed concrete shall be kept continually wet. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be continued as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Burlap shall be used only on surfaces that will be unexposed in the finished work and shall be in two layers.

D. Impervious Sheet Curing - All surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted with a fine spray of water and be completely covered with waterproof paper, polyethylene sheeting, or with polyethylene-coated burlap having the burlap thoroughly water-saturated before placing. Covering shall be laid with light colored side up. Covering shall be lapped not less than 12 inches and securely weighted down or shall be lapped not less than 4 inches and taped to form a continuous cover with completely closed joints. Sheets shall be weighted to prevent displacement or billowing from winds. Coverings shall be folded down over exposed edges of slabs and secured by approved means. Sheets shall be immediately repaired or replaced if tears or holes appear during the curing period.

E. Ponding - The entire concrete surface to be cured shall be immersed in water by building impervious dikes. Ponding water shall not be more than 20○F cooler than the concrete. Water quality shall be sufficient to prevent discoloration.

F. Membrane Forming Compounds - An approved impervious membrane curing compound may be used for curing concrete in structures and when surfaces do not require a rubbed or special finish. When membrane curing is used, exposed reinforcing steel and construction joint surfaces shall be covered or shielded to prevent coating with curing compound. Construction joint surfaces shall be wet cured by approved methods and this curing shall begin as soon as possible after concrete placement. Concrete surfaces in contact with forms shall be sealed immediately after completion of form removal and surface finishing. Membrane curing shall be applied as soon as surface moisture has evaporated. Method and application rate of curing compound shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, but in no case shall the application rate be less than 1 gallon per 100 square feet of surface area. The compound shall be applied in 1 or 2 applications. if the compound is applied in 2 increments, the second application shall follow the first application shall follow the first application within 30 minutes. Satisfactory equipment shall be provided, with means to properly control and direct application of curing compound on concrete surfaces to result in uniform coverage. If rain falls on newly coated concrete before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, or if the film is damaged, a new coat of compound shall be applied to affected portions.

3.11 SURFACE FINISH

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all exposed surfaces, except wearing surface slabs, floors and sidewalks, shall receive a "Type 2" finish (rubbed). Unexposed surfaces shall have "Type 1" finish (ordinary). Sidewalks and drives shall have a "Type 3" finish (broomed), wearing surface slabs a Type "4" finish and floors a "Type 5" finish as defined below:

1. Type 1 Ordinary Surface Finish - An ordinary surface finish shall consist of all repairs previously mentioned relative to concrete finishing. Finished surface shall be true and even, free from projections, depressions or stone pockets. inability of the Contractor to


complete satisfactory repairs or poor form quality resulting in excessive blemishes shall require a Type 2 finish at no addition compensation.

2. Type 2 Rubbed Finish - After concrete has set sufficiently to permit it, the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and rubbed with a carborundum or other abrasive of equal quality to bring the surface to a smooth texture and remove all form marks. The paste formed by the rubbing as above described may be spread uniformly over the surface and allowed to take a reset, after which it shall be finished by floating with a canvas, carpet-faced or cork float or rubbed down with dry burlap.

3. Type 3 Sidewalk Finish - After placement and consolidation, the surface shall be struck off with a strike board and floated with wooden or cork float. Edges and joints shall be tooled with an edging tool. Variation of the surface shall not exceed 1/8 inch under a 10 foot straightedge. Surface texture shall be granular, matte or lightly broomed.

4. Type 4 Wearing Slab Finish - Slab wearing surfaces shall be monolithically finished with a wood float. The concrete shall be tamped with special tools to force the coarse aggregate away from the surface, then screeded and floated with the straight-edge to bring the surface to the required surface level as shown on the plans. While the concrete is still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear a man's weight without deep imprint, it shall be wood floated to a true even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. Sufficient pressure shall be used on the wood floats to bring the moisture to the surface. An edging tool shall be used on edges and at expansion joints.

5. Type 5 Floor Finish - After placement, consolidation and screeding bull floating (or darbying) shall per performed. No finishing operation shall be performed on a slab surface while bleed water is present. Bull floating shall be completed before excess bleed water accumulates on the surface without being overworked. Concrete surfacing tolerance shall not exceed 1/8' in 10 feet. Final finishing shall commence after bleed water has evaporated and the concrete supports foot pressure with only slight indentation. Spreading dry cement and/or sand on wet spots to hasten drying or any other purpose is not permitted at any time. Edging and jointing is to be followed by hand or power floating. Floating shall be performed with wood or metal hand floats or mechanical driven float blades. Power floating shall be conducted in a manner not resulting in cement paste being removed and clinging to the blades. Troweling shall follow the floating as described previously. Surface after troweling shall be dense, smooth and blemish free. Multiple trowelings may be required to achieve the required surface traits. Troweling shall continue until the trowel makes a ringing sound moving over the hardening concrete. Areas exposed to view and those areas to receive resilient floor finish shall be given a smooth steel trowelled finish free of all marks and blemishes. Areas to receive ceramic or quarry tile, terrazzo, or similar finishes shall be screeded to elevation required. All finished surfaces shall be free of gravel pockets or honeycomb.

3.12 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Forms for surfaces not requiring a rubbed or special finish, and supporting forms and falsework for structure members such as bent caps, beams and slabs, shall be removed in accordance with one of the following methods.

1. Forms and falsework may be removed as soon as concrete has attained 80% of its specified 28 days compressive strength, as determined by cylinder tests.


2. Forms and falsework may be removed when concrete has aged for the minimum number of curing days in the following table:

Form Type/Location Min. Days to Removal

Under slabs, beams, or pile caps with span lengths of 10 ft. and less.

7

Under slabs, beams, or pile caps with span lengths over 10 ft. and less than 17 ft..

7 plus 1 day for each foot of span over 10 ft.

Under slabs, beams, or pile caps with span lengths over 17 ft..

14

Under portions of slabs that cantilever more than 1 ft. 7

Walls, columns, side forms for beams, and pile caps that cantilever 1 ft. or less.

1

B. The terms "curing day" will be interpreted as a calendar day on which the temperature is above 50○F for at least 19 hours. Colder days may be counted if satisfactory provision is made to maintain air temperature adjacent to concrete above 50○F throughout the day.

C. During continued cold weather, when artificial heat is not provided, the Engineer may permit removal of forms and falsework at the end of a period of calendar days equal to 2 times the number of curing days stated above. In determining the time for removal of forms and falsework and discontinuance of heating, consideration will be given to location and character of the structure, weather and other conditions influencing setting of concrete.

D. The foregoing provisions for form and falsework removal shall apply only to forms or parts of forms so constructed as to permit removal without disturbing forms or falsework which are required to be left in place for a longer period on other portions of the structure. Regardless of the outlined schedule no removal shall occur until sufficient strength has developed to handle anticipated loadings.

E. Methods of form removal likely to cause overstressing of concrete shall not be used. Forms and their supports shall not be removed without approval. Supports shall be removed in such manner as to permit concrete to uniformly and gradually take stresses due to its own weight.

F. Immediately following the removal of forms, fins and irregular projections shall be removed from all surfaces except from those which will not be exposed to view after construction or are not to be waterproofed. Cavities produced by form ties and all other holes, honeycombed spots, broken corners or edges and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned and, after having been kept saturated with water, shall be pointed and trued with a mortar of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the concrete being finished.

END OF SECTION 033100 [03 31 00]

VENEER BRICK MASONRY 042019-1

Section 04 20 19

VENEER UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes facing brick units; pre-faced unit masonry; and reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. After receipt of the Notice of Award, the manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings detailing the equipment to be furnished including dimensional data and materials of construction. The Engineer shall promptly review this data, and return two (2) copies to the manufacturer as approved, or approved as noted. Upon receipt of accepted shop drawings, the manufacturer shall proceed with order entry and fabrication of the equipment.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 530, ACI 530.1, and IBC 2015.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY

A. Manufacturers: Unit masonry shall be selected by the Owner. Provide an allowance of $450.00 per thousand in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the Standard General Conditions.

B. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW;

C. Brick Size and Shape: “Modular” shape & size. Furnish special units for 90-degree corners, lintels and bull-nosed corners.

2.2 ANCHORS

A. Brick veneer anchors shall be adjustable H.D. galvanized seismic veneer anchors.

B. Wire components shall be min. 3/16”, and sheet metal components shall be min. 16 ga.

2.3 WEEPS AND VENTS

A. Weep hole vents shall be Hohmann & Barnard QV-Quadro Vent, or approved equal. Match color to selected mortar color.

042019-2 VENEER UNIT MASONRY

2.4 PENETRANT/WEATHER BARRIER

A. Penetrant/weather barrier shall be Eneseal MP, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniform thickness.

B. Coursing:

1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave

C. Placing and Bonding:

1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 5. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment

is required, remove mortar and replace. 7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure straight, clean,

unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 8. Isolate masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with

compressible joint filler.

3.2 ANCHORS

A. Install joint reinforcement and anchors:

1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16” O.C. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend minimum 16” each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6”. 5. Secure wall ties to stud framed backing and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16”

O.C. vertically and 16” O.C. horizontally. 6. Place wall ties at maximum 8” O.C. vertically within 8” of jamb of wall openings. 7. Place wall ties at maximum 8” O.C. horizontally within 8” of head and sill of wall openings. 8. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16” O.C.

VENEER BRICK MASONRY 042019-3

3.3 WEEPS AND VENTS

A. Furnish and installs weeps and vents at 24” O.C. horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.

3.4 JOINTS

A. Install control and expansion joints:

1. Exterior Walls: 20’ O.C. and within 24” on one side of each interior and exterior corner.

2. Interior Walls: 30’ O.C. 3. At changes in wall height.

B. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.

C. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints.

D. Size control joint in accordance instructions from sealant manufacturer for best sealant performance.

E. Form expansion joint by omitting mortar and cutting unit to form open space.

3.5 WEATHER PROOFING

A. After installation clean all soiled surfaces. Apply penetrant/weather barrier in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION 042019 [04 20 19]

COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-1

Section 05 40 00

COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cold formed metal framing for walls, ceilings, roofs, including bridging, bracing, clips, and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

3. ASTM A 1003 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.

4. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

5. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inch to 0.112 inch in thickness.

6. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing Members. 7. ASTM C 1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and

Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. 8. ASTM C 1513 - Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel

Framing Connections.

B. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

C. AISI S240 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing.

D. AWS D.1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. After receipt of the Notice of Award, the manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings detailing the materials to be furnished including dimensional data and materials of construction. The Engineer shall promptly review this data, and return two (2) copies to the manufacturer as approved, or approved as noted. Upon receipt of accepted shop drawings, the manufacturer shall proceed with order entry and fabrication of the materials.

054000-2 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING


A. Contractor shall provide effective, full time quality control over all fabrication and erection complying with the pertinent codes and regulations of government agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

C. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member in good standing of the Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA).

E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel.

F. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING

A. Protect and store materials protected from exposure to rain, snow or other harmful weather conditions. Products to be handled per AISI S202 "Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Provide structural studs, joists, and tracks of sizes as shown on the Drawings. Thickness of tracks, headers, and jambs shall not be less than that specified for the associated studs or joists.

B. Framing Component Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required for a complete system.

1. Flat strapping. 2. Angles, plates, sheets. 3. Custom brake-formed shapes.

C. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; Steel, complying with ASTM C 1513; Galvanized coating, plated or oil-phosphate coated complying with ASTM B 633 as needed for required corrosion resistance.

D. Touch-Up Paint: Complying with ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. Zinc rich, containing 95-percent metallic zinc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Formed Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M; unless indicated otherwise.

COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-3

B. Protective Coating: CP60 coating designator minimum (G60, A60, AZ50, GF30), complying with ASTM C 955 and AISI S240.

1. Where required: CP90 coating designator minimum (G90, AZ50, GF45), complying with ASTM C 955 and AISI S240.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Framing components may be pre-assembled into panels prior to erecting.

B. Fabricate panels square, with components attached in a manner so as to prevent racking or distortion.

C. Cut all framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened.

D. Provide insulation as specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs and double header members, which will not be accessible to the insulation contractor.

E. Axially Loaded Studs:

1. Install studs to have full bearing against inside track web (1/8 inches (3.2 mm) maximum gap) prior to stud and track attachment.

2. Splices in axially loaded studs are not permitted.

F. Fasteners: Fasten components using self-tapping screws or welding.

G. Welding: Welding is permitted on 18 gauge or heavier material only.

1. Specify welding configuration and size on the Structural Calculation submittal. 2. Qualify welding operators in accordance with Section 6.0 of AWS D.1.3. 3. Touch up all welds with zinc-rich paint in compliance with ASTM A 780.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation, inspect previous work of all other trades. Verify that all work is complete and accurate to the point where this installation may properly proceed in strict accordance with framing shop drawings.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 ERECTION

A. General Erection Requirements:

1. Install cold-formed framing in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 1007. 2. Weld in compliance with AWS D.1.3.

054000-4 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

3. Install in compliance with applicable sections of the AISI S240 "North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing."

B. Wall Systems:

1. Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with approved shop drawings.

2. Handle and lift prefabricated panels in a manner so as not to cause distortion in any member.

3. Anchor track securely to the supporting structure as shown on the erection drawings. Install concrete anchors only after full compressive strength has been achieved. Provide a sill sealer or gasket barrier between all concrete and steel connections.

4. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting pieces of track to a common structural element, or butt-weld or splice them together.

5. Align and plumb studs, and securely attach to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks except when vertical movement is specified.

6. Install jack studs or cripples below window sills, above window and door heads, at freestanding stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support, securely attached to supporting members.

7. Attach wall stud bridging in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows according to manufacturer's recommendations.

8. Frame wall openings to include headers and supporting studs as shown in the Drawings. 9. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed. 10. Provide stud walls at locations indicated on plans as "shear walls" for frame stability and

lateral load resistance. 11. Where indicated in the drawings, provide for structural vertical movement using a vertical

slide clip or other means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Steel Joists:

1. Locate joists directly over bearing studs within 3/4 inch (19 mm) or provide a suitable load distribution member at the top track.

2. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points where indicated in Drawings. 3. Provide joist bridging as shown in drawings. 4. Provide end blocking where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: Periodic special inspections are required by local code authorities.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 054000 [05 40 00]

HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES 081100-1

Section 08 11 00

HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Steel doors and steel frames.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 1998.

B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.

C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998.

D. ANSI A250.11, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

E. ASTM A 366/A 366M - Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon, (0.15 Maximum Percent) Cold-Rolled; 1997.

F. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1998.

G. ASTM E-90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

H. DHI A115.1G - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware; 1994.

I. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows; 1999.

J. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies; 1995.

K. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1997.

L. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


081100-2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience manufacturing products specified this Section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified this Section.

C. All products shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A250.8, "SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".

D. Acoustical Doors shall have a minimum Sound Transmission Classification (STC) Rating of 38 with standard honeycomb core and be tested in accordance with ASTM E-90-87, "Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements". Optional STC openings available - 42, 43, 47, 48, 50 and 52 - all tested in accordance with ASTM E90 and E413.

E. Insulated Doors shall have:

1. A "U Factor" of 0.13 for a Polystyrene core.

F. Fire Rated Doors:

1. Doors shall be tested in accordance with UL 10B, "Fire Tests of Door Assemblies", NFPA 252, "Fire Tests of Door Assemblies", and UL 10C, "Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies".

2. Doors must have an approved marking or physical label, applied by an authorized facility, in accordance with the procedure set forth by an independent certification agency.

G. Stairwell Doors shall have a 250 degree F temperature rise rating (30 minute fire test duration.) The fire label on the door shall indicate the specific hourly rating.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle, store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions and ANSI/SDI A250.10 and NAAMM/HMMA 840.

B. Store frames in an upright position with heads uppermost under cover. Place on 4 inch (102 mm) high wood sills to prevent rust and damage. Store assembled frames five units maximum in a stack with 2 inch (51 mm) space between frames to promote air circulation.

C. Do not store under non-vented plastic or canvas shelters.

D. Remove wrappers immediately if they become wet.


1.6 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Cold rolled commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M.

B. Galvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quality, hot-dipped.

1. Coating Thickness: A60 coating.

2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Doors: Full flush (No Vertical Face Seams), complying with ANSI A250.8; face panels laminated to core and complete unit closed with steel perimeter channels projection welded to face sheets.

1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). a. ANSI Level 2, Model 1; 18 gage (unless noted otherwise on the Drawings) faces,

visible edge seams. 2. Faces:

a. Full flush. 3. Face Material:

a. Exterior doors: Galvannealed steel sheet. b. Interior doors: Cold Roll steel sheet.

4. Insulated Doors: Insulated; U-value of 0.13, polystyrene core. 5. Core: Doors fabricated by laminating panels to a specified core and the complete unit

closed with steel perimeter channels, projection welded to the face sheets. Core shall be as follows: a. Expanded polystyrene core.

B. Door Reinforcements:

1. Top and Bottom Channels: 16 gage steel, projection welded to both face sheets at a maximum of 2-1/2 inched (64 mm) on center.

2. Hinge Reinforcement: Hinge reinforcing channel shall be projection welded to both face sheets at a maximum of 5 inches (127 mm) on center. a. DL Series: 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick. Reinforced with continuous 16 gage channel

with additional 9 gage reinforcements located at each hinge preparation.


3. Lock Reinforcing Channel: Lock reinforcing channel shall be projection welded to both face sheets. a. DL Series: Non beveled and reinforced with a continuous 16 gage channel. 16

gage reinforcements for mortised or cylindrical locks are of an integral type in accordance with ANSI A115 standards.

4. Closer Reinforcement: 12 gage box type reinforcement, 18 inches (457 mm) long.

C. Fire Rated Doors: Ratings as indicated on Door Schedule, when tested in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

1. Labeled by UL or WH. 2. Stairwell Doors: 250 degrees F (139 degrees C) temperature rise rating as well as the

required fire rating.

D. Flush Honeycomb Core Acoustical Doors: Sound Transmission Classification (STC) Rating of 38 when tested according to ASTM E 90.

2.3 FRAMES CONSTRUCTION

A. Frames: Formed steel sheet, with 2 inch (50 mm) wide face jambs and heads unless otherwise indicated; complying with ANSI A250.8.

1. Frame Depth: Fixed, as indicated on drawings. 2. ANSI Level 2 Doors: 16 gage (unless noted otherwise on the Drawings) frames. 3. Material:

a. Exterior doors: Galvannealed steel sheet. b. Interior doors: Cold Roll steel sheet.

4. Corners: Mitered; knockdown type. 5. Provide 3 silencers for single doors, 2 silencers on head of frame for pairs of doors. 6. Finish: Factory prime finish.

B. Reinforcements for 1-3/4 Inch (44 mm) Frames:

1. Hinge Reinforcements: 9 gage (3.8 mm). 2. Strike Reinforcement: 10 gage (3.4 mm) equivalent. 3. Closer Reinforcements: 12 gage (2.6 mm).

C. Frame Anchors: Minimum of six wall anchors and two base anchors. Provide with an additional anchor for every 30 inches (760 mm) over 90 inches (2286 mm).

2.4 FACTORY FINISH

A. All doors, frames, and stick components shall be cleaned and finished in accordance with ANSI A250.10, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames".

B. Preparation: Clean and phosphatize surfaces of steel doors and frames".

C. Primer: Apply one coat of a gray, alkyd acrylic enamel primer, forced cured.


D. Finish: Paint with alkyd acrylic enamel using a two-coat process, with each coat being force cured after each coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that substrate conditions are acceptable for installation of doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and technical bulletins.

C. Verify door frame openings are installed plumb, true, and level.

D. Select fasteners of adequate type, number, and quality to perform intended functions.

E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install frames plumb, level, rigid and in true alignment in accordance with ANSI A250.11, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and ANSI A115.IG, "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware".

C. All frames other than slip-on types shall be fastened to the adjacent structure to retain their position and stability. Drywall slip-on frames shall be installed in prepared wall openings, and shall use pressure type and sill anchors to maintain stability.

D. Where grouting is required in masonry installations, frames shall be braced or fastened to prevent the pressure of the grout from deforming the frame members. Grout shall be mixed to provide a 4 inch (102 mm) maximum slump and hand troweled into place. Grout mixed to a thin "pumpable" consistency shall not be used.

E. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80 and local code authority requirements.

F. Install doors to maintain alignment with frames to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. Adjust to maintain perimeter clearances as required. Shim as needed to assure the proper clearances are achieved.


G. Install hardware as specified in Section 08710 in accordance with the hardware manufacturer's recommendations and templates. ANSI A115.IG, "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware" shall be consulted for other pertinent information.

3.4 CLEARANCES

A. Clearance between the door and frame head and jambs for both single swing and pairs of doors shall be 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

B. Clearance between the meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 3/16 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch (5 mm plus or minus 1.6 mm). For fire rated applications, the clearance between the meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch (3.2 mm plus or minus 1.6 mm).

C. Bottom clearance shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm). (Standard)

D. The clearance between the face of the door and door stop shall be 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch (1.6 mm plus or minus 3.2 mm).

E. All clearances shall be, unless otherwise specified, subject to a tolerance of plus or minus 1/32 inch (.4 mm).

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust doors for free swing without binding.

B. Adjust hinge sets, locksets, and other hardware. Lubricate using a suitable lubricant compatible with door and frame coatings.

C. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before owner's acceptance.

D. Remove from project site and legally dispose of construction debris associated with this work.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 081100 [08 11 00]

DOOR HARDWARE 081700-1

Section 08 17 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide door hardware for use with the doors specified under other sections of these Specifications. Obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. After receipt of the Notice of Award, the manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings detailing the items to be furnished including dimensional data and materials of construction. The Engineer shall promptly review this data, and return two (2) copies to the manufacturer as approved, or approved as noted. Upon receipt of accepted shop drawings, the manufacturer shall proceed with order entry.


A. Supplier shall be a recognized building hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same area of the project for a period of not less than two years and who is or has in employment an experienced hardware consultant who is available at reasonable times during the course of the work for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MORTISE LOCKSETS

A. Locksets for exterior doors, and/or as noted on the Drawings, shall be mortise type locksets, Yale 8822FL, or approved equal.

1. Locks must be certified ANSI/BHMAA156.13 Series 1000, Grade 3 2. Locks shall have an outside keyed deadbolt with inside thumbturn. 3. When deadbolt is projected, outside lever shall automatically lock. Operation of the

inside lever shall unlock the latchbolt and deadbolt simultaneously to provide anti-panic operation.

4. Locks required for fire doors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for ratings of 3 hour (A label) and less.

5. Stainless steel mechanism, ¾” stainless steel latchbolt throw 6. Field reversible handing 7. ADA compliant 8. Locks shall have brass 6-Pin cylinder, standard 9. Provide two, nickel silver keys with each lock 10. Locks shall have a ten year limited warranty

081700-2 DOOR HARDWARE

2.2 LOCK/LATCHSETS

A. Lock/latchsets shall be Yale 5300LN, or approved equal.

1. Locks must be certified ANSI/BHMAA156.2 Series 4000, Grade 2 2. Locks shall be non-handed with bi-directional lever operation, except "G" and "Y" lever

designs 3. Lock levers shall be made of solid material 4. Locks shall comply with UL10C and UBC 7-2 positive pressure requirements 5. Locks required for fire doors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for ratings of 3

hour (A label) and less. 6. Locks shall mount in a standard 161 door prep (2-1/8 inch dia.) without additional

through-bolt preps 7. Locks shall have a 2-3/4 inch (70mm) backset standard, with 2-3/8 inch (60mm) offered

as an option 8. Strikes shall be non-handed with curved lip. Provide wrought boxes with strikes. 9. Locks shall have brass 6-Pin cylinder, standard 10. Provide two, nickel silver keys with each lock 11. Locks shall have a five year limited warranty

2.3 CLOSERS

A. Door closers shall be Yale Series 5100, or approved equal.

1. Door closers shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 2 requirements. 2. Door closers shall be UL listed (US and Canada) for use on fire doors. 3. Door closer shall meet the requirements of UL 10C positive pressure fire tests. 4. Provide closers adjustable from sizes 1-6. 5. Closers shall be non-handed to meet a variety of door conditions and design

requirements. 6. Closing speed, latching speed and backcheck shall be controlled by separate key operated,

captivated valves. 7. Closers shall have heat treated rack and pinion construction. 8. An increase of 15 percent in closing power shall be provided by means of adjustment of

the arm leverage at the foot connection. 9. Closer main arms shall be heavy duty steel. 10. Door closer bodies: One piece door closer body shall be of high strength cast aluminum

alloy. 11. Adjustment valves shall be captivated and non-critical. 12. Closer spindle shaft shall be sealed hydraulically with an “O” ring. 13. Projection of closer body from door shall not exceed 2-3/16" (56mm). 14. Closer covers shall be constructed of high impact plastic material of flame retardant

grade, secured by machine screws. 15. Closers shall be suitable for standard, top jamb, and parallel arm type applications when

provided with proper brackets and arms.

2.4 HINGES

A. Hinges shall be stainless steel with stainless steel pins.

DOOR HARDWARE 081700-3

B. Ball bearing hinges shall be provided for doors with closers and for entry doors.

C. Three hinges shall be provided for swinging doors 1-3/4” thick and larger.

2.5 FINISH

A. Finish of all door hardware shall be selected by the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately with identification relating to the hardware schedule and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations for the installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish hardware templates if required to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to be factory prepared for the installation of hardware.

B. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware by the Door and Hardware Institute except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as may be otherwise directed by Engineer.

C. Install hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instruction and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finished work. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.

D. Set units level, plumb, and true-to-line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

F. Cut and fit thresholds and floor covers to profile of door frames with mitered corners and hairline joints and join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts, and similar items, if any.

G. Adjust and check operation of hardware for each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

END OF SECTION 081700 [08 17 00]

OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS 083323-1

Section 08 33 23

OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Provide standard overhead coiling doors including door curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanisms, operators, and installation accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1.3 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide Owner with three (3) copies of printed instructions indicating various pieces of equipment by name and model number complete with parts listed and maintenance and repair instructions. Submit the manuals to the Engineer for approval.

1.4 DESIGN

A. Clearance requirements for the rolling service doors shall be compatible with the building dimensions.

B. Design and reinforce rolling doors to withstand a wind loading pressure with a maximum deflection of 1/120 of opening width based on a design wind loading pressure of 44 psf.

C. Barrel deflection shall not exceed 0.03" per foot of span under full load.

D. Design torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of case-hardened steel of required size to hold the fixed spring ends and carry the torsional load.

E. Design door assembly, including operator, to operate for not less than 20,000 cycles.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience manufacturing products specified this Section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified this Section.

083323-2 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS

1.6 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Interlocking door curtain slats shall be structural quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A, with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653. Front and back of curtain slats shall be 24 gauge (minimum). Slats shall powder coated with a weather resistant polyester powder coating. Color shall be selected by Owner. Slats shall be insulated with rigid cellular polystyrene or foamed-in-place, CFC/HCFC free polyurethane providing a minimum R-7.7.

B. Bottom bar shall consist of 2 galvanized steel angles, each not less than 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" thick.

C. Endlocks shall be malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.

D. Curtain jamb guides shall be 3/16” thick (minimum) galvanized steel angles or galvanized steel channels and angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain the curtain loading. Fabricate steel hoods for doors of not less than 24 gage hot dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating complying with ASTM A 653.

E. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance the weight of the curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to the barrel and the shaft.

F. Spring barrel shall be of hot formed structural quality carbon steel, welded or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support the roll-up of curtain without distortion of slats.

G. Doors shall be fabricated for face-of-wall mounting as shown on the Drawings. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment.

H. Windlocks shall be provided as required to meet the design wind load.

I. Counterbalance doors by means of an adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and mounted in a spring barrel and connected to the door curtain with the barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings to self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS 083323-3

J. Form an entirely enclosed coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and act as a weather seal. Contour to suit end brackets for which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface mounted hoods and any portion of hood and jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

2.2 OPERATORS

A. Provide a manual chain hoist operator consisting of an endless steel hand chain, chain pocket wheel and guard and a geared reduction unit with a maximum 35 pounds pull for door operation. Design chain hoist with a self-locking mechanism allowing the curtain to be stopped at any point in its travel and to remain in position until movement is reactivated. Furnish cadmium plated alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. Chain-hoist doors shall have chain keepers suitable for padlocks.

2.3 WEATHER SEALS

A. Provide natural rubber or neoprene rubber weather-stripping for exterior exposed doors. Secure weather seals with continuous metal pressure bars. At door heads, use a 1/8" thick continuous sheet secured to the inside of the curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use a 1/8" thick continuous strip secured to the exterior side of the jamb guide. Provide a replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene between angles as a weather seal and cushion bumper. Weather seal package shall meet IECC 2015 C402.4.3.

B. The Contractor shall caulk the entire door frame perimeter to ensure complete weather tightness.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that substrate conditions are acceptable for installation of doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and technical bulletins.

C. Verify door frame openings are installed plumb, true, and level.

D. Select fasteners of adequate type, number, and quality to perform intended functions.

E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

083323-4 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install frames plumb, level, rigid and in true alignment.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust doors to operate without binding.

B. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before owner's acceptance.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 083323 [08 33 23]

VINYL WINDOWS 085313-1

Section 08 53 13

VINYL WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes vinyl windows as scheduled on the Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturer Association (AAMA)

1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2 /A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights (NAFS).

B. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)

1. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Thermal Properties 2. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient

and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence.

C. ASTM International.

1. ASTM E90 – Laboratory measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission of Building Partitions and Elements.

2. ASTM E1332 – Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor – Indoor Sound Attenuation.


A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years installing similar assemblies.

B. Certifications: AAMA certification label indicating assemblies meet the design requirements.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Assemblies will be free from defects in materials and workmanship from the date of manufacture for the time periods indicated below:

1. Window Unit: 10 years. 2. Glazing:

085313-2 VINYL WINDOWS

a. Insulated Glass: 10 years against seal breakage b. Laminated Glass: 5 years against delamination. c. Specialty Glazing: 5 years against delamination.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL WINDOWS - GENERAL

A. Design Requirements

1. Provide windows capable of complying with requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer’s window that are representative of those specified and that are of test size required by AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

2. Test Size: In compliance with requirements of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S2/A440. 3. Structural Requirements: Provide assemblies complying with requirements indicated:

a. Performance Class: LC. b. Performance Grade: 50.

4. NFRC Requirements: Provide assemblies complying with the following total window ratings: a. U-Factor: 0.50 in accordance with NFRC 100. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.60 in accordance with NFRC 200. c. Visible Transmittance (VT): 0.65 in accordance with NFRC 200.

B. Finish

1. Interior: as selected by Owner. 2. Exterior: as selected by Owner.

2.2 WINDOW ASSEMBLIES

A. Fabrication:

1. Frame: fusion welded corners. 2. Sash: fusion welded corners. 3. Sash thickness: 1-1/8” 4. Glass: Mounted using silicone glazing compound or glazing tape.

B. Hardware:

1. Balance: block and tackle system. 2. Lock: cam-lock.

C. Glazing:

1. Strength: annealed glass. 2. Type: insulated glass.

a. Two panes of glass utilizing a continuous roll formed stainless steel and dual seal sealant.

b. Overall nominal thickness: ¾”

VINYL WINDOWS 085313-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect window prior to installation.

B. Inspect rough opening for compliance with window manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare windows for installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Insert window into rough opening.

B. Shim side jambs straight.

C. Inspect window for square, level and plumb.

D. Fasten window through jamb, shim and into rough opening jamb.

E. Test and adjust for smooth operation of window.

F. Ensure weep holes are clear of debris for proper drainage.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove film from glass.

B. Clean the exterior surface and glass with mild soap and water.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed windows from damage.

END OF SECTION 085313 [08 53 13]

GYPSUM BOARD 092900-1

Section 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior gypsum board for walls and ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. After receipt of the Notice of Award, the manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings detailing the materials to be furnished including dimensional data and materials of construction. The Engineer shall promptly review this data, and return two (2) copies to the manufacturer as approved, or approved as noted. Upon receipt of accepted shop drawings, the manufacturer shall proceed with order entry and fabrication of the materials.


A. Gypsum Board Standard: GA-216 by Gypsum Association.

B. Applicable standards as required by Chapter 25 of the 2015 IBC.

C. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall systems with fire resistance ratings are indicated or are required to comply with governing regulations, provide materials and installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been tested and listed by recognized authorities, including UL and AIA. Comply with FM "Approval Guide" where applicable.

D. Manufacturer: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer gypsum boards

E. Allowable Tolerances: 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/4" in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp, and bow.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD

A. Provide regular type gypsum board sheets with tapered long edges. Thickness shall be as indicated on the drawings and, where not otherwise indicated comply with thickness requirements of GA-216 for each application and support spacing. Comply with requirements for indicated fire-resistance ratings indicated. Provide maximum length available which will minimize end joints.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide ASTM C 475 type tape recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Joints shall be perforated type.

092900-2 GYPSUM BOARD

B. Provide ready-mixed vinyl-type joint compound for interior use. Provide two (2) separate grades: one specifically for bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding.

C. Metal trim accessories shall be galvanized steel trim; corner bead casing (U shaped) (L shaped) and (J shaped) as well as control joint.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate exposed end butt Joints as far from center of wall and ceiling as possible, and stagger not less than 1'-0" in alternate course of board. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end-butt joints, which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger joints at least 1'-0". Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end-butt joints wherever possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs.

B. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" open space between boards. Do not force into place. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Attach gypsum board with screws to framing and blocking as required for additional support at openings and cutouts.

C. Form control joints and expansion joints with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive tri-accessories.

D. Isolate perimeter of non-load bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4" to ½" space and trim edge with J-type semi-finishing edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks.

E. Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum board with "floating" internal corner construction, unless isolation of the intersecting boards is indicated, or unless fire rating is indicated.

3.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work.

B. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where semi-finishing type is indicated.

C. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work, and install special kerf-type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim.

D. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled (including expansion joints).

GYPSUM BOARD 092900-3

E. Install J-type semi-finishing trim where indicated and where exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied moldings.

F. Install metal control joint (beaded type) where indicated or required.

G. Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

3.3 FINISHING

A. Apply treatment of gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges and trim accessories, penetrations, fasteners heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare the work for decoration. Pre-fill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using type compound recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where a trim accessory is indicated. Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between last 2 coats and after last coat. Omit third coat (if specified) and sanding on concealed dry-wall work which is indicated for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve fire resistance rating, sound rating, or to act as air or smoke barrier.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION 092900 [09 29 00]

PAINTING 099010-1

Section 09 90 10

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section of the specifications covers the furnishing and application of paint and/or other coatings to interior and exterior surfaces of the various structures and components of the project for protection against corrosion, deterioration and wear; and also to present a neat and pleasing appearance to those surfaces which are visible.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. After receipt of the Notice of Award, the manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer a minimum of six (6) sets of shop drawings detailing the items to be furnished including dimensional data and materials of construction. The Engineer shall promptly review this data, and return two (2) copies to the manufacturer as approved, or approved as noted. Upon receipt of accepted shop drawings, the manufacturer shall proceed with order entry.


A. The Contractor shall provide a quality control officer to inspect and supervise the preparation and coating applications. The quality control officer shall document all surface preparation, environmental conditions, wet and dry film thicknesses, etc. These quality control reports shall be submitted with each partial pay request.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials specified herein shall be as manufactured by the Tnemec Company, Inc., or approved equal.

B. Coatings, described by their generic types, are tabulated below for use with various project components and usages and are related to the conditions to which they will be exposed. Coatings shall be as listing in the following table:

099010-2 PAINTING

1. Concrete Masonry Units and Cement Board Products A. Interior Service:

Surface Prep: Clean and dry.

Dry Film Mils

1st Coat: Series 130 Cementitious Acrylic Block Filler

60-80 ft2/gal.

2nd Coat :

Series 84 Modified Aliphatic Amine Epoxy

4-6 mils

Finish Coat:

Series 84 Modified Aliphatic Amine Epoxy

4-6 mils

TOTAL MINIMUM THICKNESS

8-12 mils

B. Exterior Service (Traditional CMU):

Surface Prep: Clean and dry.

Dry Film Mils

1st Coat: Series 130 Cementitious Acrylic Block Filler

60-80 ft2/gal.

2nd Coat:

Series 156 Modified Waterborne Acrylate

6-8 mils

3rd Coat:

Series 156 Modified Waterborne Acrylate

6-8 mils


12-16 mils

C. Exterior Service (Split Faced):

Surface Prep: Clean and dry and in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

Coverage Rate

1st Coat Series 660 Prime A Pell 200

50-75 Sq. Ft./Gal

2nd Coat

Series 607 Conformal Stain

75-100 Sq. Ft./Gal

3rd Coat

Series 607 Conformal Stain

75-100 Sq. Ft./Gal

Note 1: Allow a minimum of 36 hours between 1st and 2nd coats Note 2: Apply a mock-up to determine exact coverage rate to achieve desired appearance.


12-16 mils

PAINTING 099010-3

2. Miscellaneous Surfaces A. Gypsum Board, Interior Walls and Ceilings: Surface Prep: Clean and dry.

Dry Film Mils

Primer:

PVA Sealer

1.0-2.0 mils

Intermediate:

Series 113/114 Tneme-Tufcoat Water Based Acrylic Epoxy

2.0-3.0 mils

Finish:

Series 113/114 Tneme-Tufcoat Water Based Acrylic Epoxy

2.0-3.0 mils


5.0-8.0 mils

B. Interior & Exterior Wood Surface Prep: Clean and dry.

Dry Film Mils

Primer:

Series 10-99W Primer

2.5-3.5 mils

Intermediate:

Series 2H Tneme-Gloss

2.0-3.0 mils

Finish:

Series 2H Tneme-Gloss

2.0-3.0 mils


6.0-9.5mils

C. Interior (non-galvanized) Hollow Metal Frame Doors Surface Prep: Clean and dry. Spot SSPC SP2/SP3. Feather-edge.

Dry Film Mils

Spot Primer:

Series 10-99 Primer

2.5-3.5 mils

Intermediate:

Series 1028 Enduratone

2.0-3.0 mils

Finish:


2.0-3.0 mils


6.0-9.5mils

D. Exterior (galvanized) Hollow Metal Frame Doors Surface Prep: Clean and dry. Spot SSPC SP2/SP3. Treat with Great Lakes Clean Etch, Henkel Galvaprep, or approved equal.

Dry Film Mils

Spot Primer:

Series 115 Unibond

2.0-3.0 mils

Finish:


2.0-3.0 mils


4.0-6.0mils

099010-4 PAINTING

3. Concrete Floors as Scheduled A. General Use: Surface Prep: Mechanically prepare all surfaces to be coated to remove all surface con-taminants including hardeners and curing compounds and to achieve a surface profile equivalent to ICRI CSP 3. Concrete must have cured sufficiently per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Clean and dry.

Dry Film Mils

Single Coat:

Series S281 Tneme-Glaze

10.0-12.0 mils


10.0-12.0 mils

B. Skid Resistant: Surface Prep: Mechanically prepare all surfaces to be coated to remove all surface con-taminants including hardeners and curing compounds and to achieve a surface profile equivalent to ICRI CSP 3. Concrete must have cured sufficiently per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Clean and dry.

Dry Film Mils

Primer:

Series 237 Power-Tread*

6.0-8.0 mils

Finish:

Series 281 Tneme-Glaze

6.0-8.0 mils


12.0-16.0 mils

* Broadcast 30-50 mesh silica into prime coat to achieve de-sired level of skid-resistance

C. Clear Sealer: Surface Prep: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

Dry Film Mils

1st Coat:

Series 636 Dur A Pel 20

125-250 Sq. Ft./Gal

D. Colored Sealer: Surface Prep: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

Dry Film Mils

1st Coat:

Series 636 Dur A Pel 20

125-250 Sq. Ft./Gal

2nd Coat:

Series 617 Conformal Stain WB

125-200 Sq. Ft./Gal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The structures and/or other surfaces which are to be painted or coated and the paint or coatings to be used are shown on the Drawings and/or described herein.

B. Substrate surface shall be prepared and the paint or coating mixed and applied in strict conformance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.

C. The Contractor shall repair all damage to prime or shop coatings before proceeding with application of field coats. It is his entire responsibility to determine the compatibility of the prime

PAINTING 099010-5

or shop coating with the field coating before it is applied, regardless of prior approval having been given by the Owner or his agent.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Thoroughly examine surface scheduled to be painted prior to commencing work. Report in writing to the Owner's representative any condition that may affect proper application and overall performance of coating system. Do not proceed with work until such conditions have been corrected. Commencing with work indicates acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for performance of applied coating.

B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film.

C. Diligence should be taken to ensure that vehicles, equipment, fixtures, miscellaneous hardware, etc. are protected against spillage, overspray, etc. Surfaces not to be coated will be marked, removed, or otherwise covered to protect against cleaning and coating application procedures and weather. Such damages shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Surface preparation of steel will be based upon comparison with SSPC-Vis 1, "Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces"; SSPC-Vis 2, "Standards Methods of Evaluation Degree of Rusting on Painting Steel Surfaces"; and "Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive".

B. Materials shall be mixed, thinned and applied according to the manufacturer's printed instructions.

C. No paint shall be applied when it is expected that the relative humidity will exceed 85%, when the surface temperature is less than 5F above the dew point or when the air temperature will drop below 45 degrees F. within 4 hours after the application of the paint.

D. Maintain proper ventilation in area of work to alleviate volatile solvents evaporating from coating materials.

E. All ingredients in any container of the coating materials shall be thoroughly mixed and shall be agitated often during application to keep the pigment suspended.

F. Should thinning be required, use only the amounts specified by the coating manufacturer.

G. Application of coating shall be by brush, roller, mitt or spray and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All material shall be evenly applied to form a smooth, continuous, unbroken coating. Drips, runs, sags, or pinholes shall not be acceptable.

H. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has completely dried and within the time limit complying with the manufacturer's directions.

099010-6 PAINTING

I. No paint shall be applied when surrounding air temperature, as measured in the shade, is below 45 degrees F. except where approved by the coating manufacturer. No paint shall be applied when the temperature of the surface to be painted is below 50 degrees F. Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surface, and shall not be applied in rain, snow, fog or mist. Paint shall not be applied when the substrate temperature is less than 5 degrees above the dewpoint. Paint manufacturer's temperature guidelines must be followed.

END OF SECTION 099010 [09 90 10]

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419-1

Section 13 34 19

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of mutually dependent components including structural framing, roof panels, wall panels, soffit panels, doors, windows and accessories.

B. Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary framing, metal roof panels, metal wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. The building manufacturer shall furnish complete erection drawings showing anchor bolt settings, sidewall, endwall and roof framing, transverse cross-sections, covering and flashing details, and accessory installation details to clearly indicate the proper assembly of all building parts. All submittals furnished under this section of the specifications shall be stamped by a Louisiana licensed professional engineer. Submittals shall include design calculations and foundation reactions.

1.3 DESIGN

A. All structural steel sections and welded plate members shall be designed in accordance with the AISC, "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings". All cold formed structural members and exterior coverings shall be designed in accordance with the AISI, "Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition.

B. The building shall be designed in accordance with the 2015 International Building Code with a 20 PSF roof live load and a 5 PSF collateral load. Environmental loading and importance factor shall be as listed on the drawings.

133419-2 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Buildings shall be as manufactured by Ideal Steel, LLC, Broussard, LA (337) 560-9667, or approved equal.

2.2 STRUCTURAL FRAMING MEMBERS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55.

B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55; or ASTM A529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

E. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through 55, or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70; or cold- rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80, or High- Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70.

F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A755M.

1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50 or 80; with Class AZ50 coating designation.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

G. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: H.D. galvanized

I. Anchor bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: H.D. galvanized


2.3 STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly.

1. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. 2. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding

process. 3. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural

tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings.

4. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing members. 5. Finish:

a. Warehouse: H.D. galvanized. b. All other areas: Red oxide primer

B. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.

1. Finish: a. Canopy building: H.D. galvanized. b. All other areas: Red oxide primer

2.4 METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Reverse-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Roof Panels: Formed with recessed, trapezoidal major valleys and intermediate stiffening valleys symmetrically spaced between major valleys; designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.

1. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet 2. Thickness: 24 ga. (min.) 3. Exterior Finish: Modified silicone-polyester two-coat system consisting of a 0.20-0.25 mil

primer with a 0.7-0.8 mil color coat. 4. Major Rib Spacing: 12” O.C. 5. Panel Coverage: 36”. 6. Fasteners: Cup-head hex drive screw with gasket.

7. Uplift Rating: UL 90.

2.5 METAL WALL & LINER PANELS

A. Reverse-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with recessed, trapezoidal major valleys and intermediate stiffening valleys symmetrically spaced between major valleys; designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.



primer with a 0.7-0.8 mil color coat. 4. Major Rib Spacing: 12” O.C. 5. Panel Coverage: 36”. 6. Fasteners: Cup-head hex drive screw with gasket.

2.6 METAL SOFFIT PANELS

A. Smooth or corrugated, Exposed-Fastener Metal Soffit Panels: designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.


primer with a 0.7-0.8 mil color coat. 4. Rib Height for Corrugated Panels: 7/8” (max.). 5. Panel Coverage: 32”. 6. Fasteners: Cup-head hex drive screw with gasket.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels.

2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet, designed to withstand negative- load requirements.

3. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1” thick, flexible closure strips; cut or pre-molded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.


6. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacer blocks of thickness required to provide 1” standoff; fabricated from extruded polystyrene.

C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1” thick, flexible closure strips; cut or pre-molded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 26 ga., metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels.

1. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.

2. Opening Trim: Minimum 26 ga., metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum- zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

E. Gutters: Formed from minimum 26 ga., metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum- zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Gutter supports shall be fabricated from the same material and finish and shall be spaced a maximum of 36” O.C.

F. Downspouts: Formed from 26 ga., zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot- long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Mounting straps shall be fabricated from the same material and finish and shall be spaced a maximum of 10’ O.C.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

1. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer.

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head.


3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

D. Metal Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape of manufacturer's standard size.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone- rubber sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building system manufacturer.

E. Insulation:

1. Where called for on the Drawings, vinyl covered fiberglass insulation shall be provided on insides of walls and roof. Insulation shall have a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-developed index of not more than 450.

2. For insulated buildings, purlins shall be insulated to eliminate “thermal short circuits” between purlins and roof panels through the installation of thermal blocks at each purlin location. Thermal blocks shall consist of R-5 rigid insulation extending a minimum of 1” beyond the width of the purlin on each side.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances.

C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition.


B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings.

B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer.

C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

D. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do

not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double- nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.

G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high- strength bolts.

1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fascia. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows,

louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.

H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.

1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.


I. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.

3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal panel installation.

B. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes.

2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar

elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in

alignment. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.

C. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. 2. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated

items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Size control joint in accordance instructions from sealant manufacturer for best sealant performance. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer.


3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations.

1. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 2. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with

self-tapping screws.

B. Field-Assembled, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer

tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 4. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to

thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 5. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge caps.

C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self- tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.

D. Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.6 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing.

2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum. 4. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable

panels over metal wall panels at eave height. 5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to

thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter

of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.


9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated, or if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.

10. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Field-Assembled, Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.7 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.

B. Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings.

3.8 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

2. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

3. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24” of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof,


form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1” deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4’ O.C. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60” O.C. in between. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.

3.9 CLEANING & PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

3.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period as follows:

1. Color fading in excess of 7 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244. 2. Chalking in excess of No. 8 rating per ASTM D 4214. 3. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking. 4. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam, metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 133419 [13 34 19]

PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS 220000-1

Section 22 00 00

PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes labor and materials for complete installation of potable water, sanitary sewer, and natural gas systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS




1.4 CODES & STANDARDS

A. Perform work in accordance with IPC 2015 and IFGC 2015 as amended by the LSUCC.

B. All materials, equipment and accessories installed under this Contract shall conform to all rules, codes, etc. as recommended by National Associations governing the manufacturer, rating and testing of such materials, equipment and accessories. All materials shall be new and of the best quality and first class in every respect. Whenever directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a sample for approval before proceeding.

C. Where laws or local regulations provide that certain accessories such as gauges, relief valves, and parts be installed on equipment, it shall be understood that such equipment be furnished complete with the necessary accessories whether or not called for in these Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXTURES

A. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all plumbing fixtures shown on accompanying Drawings. Refer to both plumbing and architectural drawings and provide all fixtures shown on either. Fixtures shall be complete with all necessary accessories required for a complete installation including traps, escutcheons, angle supplies, basin cocks, etc. All fixtures shall be new and must be delivered to the building properly crated in perfect condition.

220000-2 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS

B. All brass must be “no-lead”, of the best quality; lightweight goods will not be accepted. All brass pipe shall be seamless brass tubing and nipples shall be extra heavy. All fittings and trim shall be chromium plated heavy brass unless otherwise specified. Drain piping and fittings including "P" traps shall be PVC. All exposed piping shall be insulated. Provide cut-off valves at each fixture in both hot and cold water piping.

C. All fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act.

2.2 PIPE & FITTINGS

A. Sanitary sewer waste and vent lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC.

B. All underground domestic cold water lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC, and within walls and/or chases shall be copper tubing.

C. Copper tubing shall be government type "L" hard copper tube of standard weight and thickness. Fittings are to be solder type wrought copper fittings. Dielectric unions shall be used between copper and iron pipe.

D. Natural gas piping inside the building and aboveground shall be Sch 40 black steel. Fittings for pipe 2” and smaller shall be standard malleable iron threaded fittings. Fittings for pipe larger than 2” shall be welded steel. Exterior aboveground piping shall be coated with Scotch-Kote, or approved equal, polyethylene coating (20 mil) and all joints weatherproofed with two coats of field applied Scotch-Kote, or approved equal, wrapping tape.

E. Underground gas piping shall be polyethylene conforming to ASTM D2513. All underground polyethylene piping shall be installed with tracer wire.

F. All pipe fittings shall be same as piping specified unless indicated otherwise.

G. Approved expansion joints or flexible couplings shall be provided as necessary.

2.3 VALVES & UNIONS

A. Furnish and install all valves, unions, stops, connections, etc. shown on Drawings and necessary to make a complete system in working order. Provide valves on inlet and outlet of all equipment and fixtures and on branch lines to fixtures or groups of fixtures.

B. Valves and unions shall be as follows, or approved equal:

Item 2” & smaller Larger than 2”

Gate valve Crane 1320 Crane 461

Globe valve Crane 1310 Crane 359

Unions Crane 633 Crane Std. Gal.

Check valves Crane 1303 Crane 373


C. All valves, unions, etc. where pipe is chrome plated shall have similar finish. All exposed supplies to plumbing fixtures shall be chrome plated.

2.4 INSULATION

A. All hot water piping shall be insulated with a minimum of 1" (2" for pipes larger than 1.5") Armaflex, or approved equal, thermal insulation. Insulation conductivity shall not exceed 0.27 Btu per inch/h*ft2. Tape all insulation joints.

2.5 TEMPERATURE LIMITING DEVICES

A. Showers and public lavatories shall be protected with temperature limiting devices. Shower combination valves shall be balanced pressure actuated mixer shower valves with adjustable high temperature limit stop certified to ASSE 1016. Shower valves shall be Leonard Aquatrol 4500, or approved equal.

B. Temperature limiting devices for public lavatories shall be thermostatic mixing valves certified to ASSE 1070. Valves shall be of lead free brass, 4-port, “H” pattern body with integral check valves, screens, and adjustment nut with locking feature. Valves shall be Watts LFUSG-B, or approved equal.

2.6 FLOOR DRAINS

A. All floor drains shall be constructed of cast iron and shall be complete with clamping devices as required. Floor drains shall have bottom outlet with duracoated cast iron body with clamping collar and 6" diameter nickel bronze strainer adjustable vertically to floor level, with square perforations and vandal proof screws.

B. All floor drains shall be fitted with trap primers unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Connect trap primer to nearest lavatory drain.

2.7 HANGERS & SUPPORTS

A. Provide Grinnel, Fee and Mason, Crane or equal malleable iron split ring hangers with rod supports throughout. Strap hangers or wire will not be accepted.

B. Provide galvanized iron shields between hangers and pipe covering.

C. Provide Grinnel, Fee and mason, Crane, or equivalent heavy steel riser clamps on vertical risers at floors to support pipes.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Escutcheons shall be furnished and installed for all exposed lines passing through floors, walls and ceilings. They shall be of chrome plated brass material and shall be of such flange size as to cover necessary penetration openings.


2.9 SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves for all pipes passing through walls, floors, beams, etc. Sleeves passing through structural members shall be of cast iron or Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves passing through non-structural walls or floors shall be of 26 gauge galvanized iron.

B. Joints between sleeves and pipes passing through floors shall be made watertight with plastic materials. Where pipes pass through waterproofing membrane, flashing sleeves shall be installed.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the timely settings of all sleeves required for work under this section.

2.10 FLASHING

A. Flash all vent penetrations through roofs with 6 pound sheet lead jackets, extending approximately 8ʺ in all directions at base and with ends turned down into top of pipe. Offset vents where necessary to provide 2ʹ-0ʺ minimum clearance from other flashing for outside walls, curbs, etc.

2.11 ACCESS PANELS

A. Provide access panels where valves, drains, dampers, etc. are concealed in walls, ceilings, floors, or otherwise inaccessible. Size of panels shall be approved by the Engineer. Finish shall match that of the adjacent floor or wall.

2.12 LEAD FREE PIPING, SOLDER, & FLUX

A. All installations of, or repairs to, public water systems or residential and non-residential plumbing facilities that provide drinking water and which are connected to a public water supply shall be made using lead free piping, solder, and flux. Lead free shall refer to not containing more than a weighted average of 0.25% lead when used with respect to the wetted surfaces of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and fixtures. When used with respect to solder and flux, “lead free” refers to solder and flux containing not more than 0.2% lead.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PERMITS & INSPECTIONS

A. All local building code inspections, examinations and tests required shall be arranged and paid for by the Contractor as necessary to obtain complete and final acceptance of all mechanical systems. The Contractor shall deliver certificates of all such inspections to the Engineer.

B. Prior to requesting final inspection by the Engineer, the Contractor shall have a complete coordination and adjustment meeting of all of his subcontractors directly responsible for the operation of any portion of the system. At the time of this meeting, each and every sequence of operation shall be checked to assure proper operation. Notify the Engineer in writing ten days prior to this meeting instructing him of the time, date and whom you are requesting be present. This project shall not be accepted until the above provisions are met to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Piping shall be routed as shown on Drawings or in an acceptable manner to meet building conditions. Venting shall be as shown on plumbing riser diagrams or as required to comply with the Plumbing Code.

B. Provide reducers, increasers, special flanges, and fittings where required between piping work and fixtures in order to connect and complete work and render it ready for use. Make any offsets required to avoid construction.

C. All water closets shall be mounted with vertical closet carrier - fittings and flush valves.

D. Piping slopes shall be in accordance with the Plumbing Code unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, and piping shall be laid so slope is continuous.

E. All pipe shall be true and straight without sags or traps. All pipe shall be rigidly supported. Provide sleeves for all pipes passing through walls and floors.

F. All screwed fittings and pipe shall have threads cut to standard pipe thread dimensions. Pipe shall be properly reamed after cutting of threads.

G. Joint compound shall be applied to male threads of the screwed pipe and fittings only.

H. Care shall be taken in making up pipe and fittings such that pipe does not extend into fitting sufficiently to reduce the waterway.

I. Contractor shall furnish and install all escutcheons, inserts, thimbles, hangers, etc. required for the proper support and installation of his equipment and piping. Cooperate with other trades in locating and placing these items.

J. All piping projecting from chases shall be rigidly supported in the wall or chase. Loosely supported fixtures or accessories will not be accepted.

K. Above ground pipe shall be freeze protected.

L. Cleanouts shall be provided where shown on Drawings, at each change of direction of the building drain greater than 45o and at or near the foot of each vertical waste or soil stack. Location of all cleanouts shall be same size as piping up to 4". Larger pipe shall have 4" cleanouts unless noted otherwise. Every cleanout shall be installed so that the cleanout opens in the direction of flow of the drainage line or at right angle thereto. Floor cleanouts shall be adjustable type, double drainage flange, clamping collar, nickel bronze cover. Top of cleanout shall be level with top of finished floor so there is a continuous surface. Outside clean-outs shall be as detailed on Drawings.

3.3 TESTING

A. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the International Plumbing Code in the presence of both the Resident Engineer and the local building official.


B. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the International Plumbing Code in the presence of both the Resident Engineer and the local building official.

C. Test all plumbing sewer lines, vents, waste, etc. with a minimum of 10' water head, for 15 minutes.

D. All domestic water lines, unless elsewhere specified, shall be tested under 140 psi hydrostatic pressure for a minimum of 15 minutes. Following or concurrent with pressure testing, all domestic water lines shall also be disinfected by filling with potable water chlorinated to a concentration of 50 ppm. The heavily chlorinated water shall be held for 24 hours and then the system shall be purged with potable water.

E. Testing of gas piping shall be performed in accordance with the International Fuel Gas Code. Test pressure shall be 1.5 times the proposed maximum working pressure, but not less than 3 psig. The test duration shall be 30 minutes.

3.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide pipe markers, directional arrows, and identification bands on all piping in chases. Pipe markers shall indicate line content and shall be located 20 feet on center or at each change of direction of line. Identification bands shall be color coded to match pipe markers and shall be provided 10 feet on center. Directional arrows shall indicate normal direction of flow and shall be installed 10 feet on center between each identification band.

3.5 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the project. This guarantee shall include furnishing of all labor and material necessary to make any repairs, adjustments, or replacement of any equipment, parts, etc. necessary to restore the project to first class condition.

END OF SECTION 220000 [22 00 00]

HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS 230000-1

Section 23 00 00

HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes labor and materials for complete mechanical portion of the Project.

1.2 SUBMITTALS




1.4 CODES & STANDARDS

A. Perform work in accordance with IMC 2015 and IBC 2015 as amended by the LSUCC.

B. The entire mechanical work shall comply with the rules and regulations of the State in which this project is being constructed including the State Fire Marshal and State Board of Health. All modifications required by these authorities shall be made without additional charge to the Owner. The Mechanical Contractor shall report these changes to the Engineer and secure his approval before work is started.

C. In addition to the codes heretofore mentioned, all mechanical work and equipment shall conform to the applicable portions of the following specifications, codes and regulations:

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineer (ASHRAE), 2. National Electrical Code (NEC), 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), 5. Underwriters Laboratory (UL).

D. All materials, equipment and accessories installed under this Contract shall conform to all rules, codes, etc. as recommended by National Associations governing the manufacturer, rating and testing of such materials, equipment and accessories. All materials shall be new and of the best quality and first class in every respect. Whenever directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a sample for approval before proceeding.

230000-2 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS

E. Where laws or local regulations provide that certain accessories such as gauges, thermometers, relief valves, and parts be installed on equipment, it shall be understood that such equipment be furnished complete with the necessary accessories whether or not called for in these Specifications.


A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all exhaust fans and related ventilation equipment and accessories shown and scheduled on the plans. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and of the best grade of the make, brand and quality specified. All like materials used in the installation shall be of the same manufacturer. No equipment shall be bid on or submitted for approval if it will not fit in space provided.

B. It is the intention of these Specifications that all mechanical systems shall be furnished complete with all necessary valves, controls, insulation, piping, devices, equipment, etc. necessary to provide a satisfactory installation in complete working order.

C. Contractor shall visit the site and acquaint himself thoroughly with all existing facilities and conditions which would affect his portion of the work. Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of installing his work to meet conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DX SPLIT SYSTEM

A. The DX split system air conditioning unit, in general, shall be for the entire building providing cooling in the summer and heating in the winter. A constant amount of fresh air shall be taken into the system and all air shall be filtered. The system shall consist of an indoor air handling unit and an outdoor heat pump.

B. Outdoor heat pump shall be high-efficiency, air-cooled, top discharge where shown and as scheduled on the drawings. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, pre-charged, and tested, and shall be supplied from the factory with all features listed below.

C. Outdoor coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to an aluminum coil and shall be protected with stamped louvered panels on the outside of the unit. Fan shall be propeller type, direct drive. Motor shall have inherent protection and be of the permanently lubricated type, resiliently mounted. Fans shall be complete with safety guards. Compressor shall be single speed serviceable hermetic or sealed hermetic design complete with crankcase heater and external spring isolators and compressors, and shall have a 5 year warranty. Unit shall be equipped with a time delay to prevent compressor from stating within five minutes of “off” time.

D. All controls shall be factory wired and shall consist of fan overload devices, hard start kit, internal pressure relief valve, filter dryers pressure taps for refrigerant check, quick connect refrigerant couplings, and liquid and suction line service valves. Unit shall also be furnished with outdoor expansion valve or metering valve and check valve.


E. Casing shall be fully weatherproof for outdoor installation and shall be bonderized steel with baked enamel finish. Panels shall be removable to provide access for servicing. Unit shall be set in place on rubber mounting pads.

F. Indoor air handling unit shall be horizontal discharge of the size/type and capacity as scheduled. Units shall be complete with fan, multi-speed direct drive blower, motor, coil, low voltage control transformer, grease fittings, drain pan, etc. All units shall be factory insulated on the interior with not less than 3/4# density neoprene coated fiberglass cemented in place with water proof adhesive. Unit shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum static pressure. Fan capacities shall be rated with the fans in the unit, and the horsepower specified shall include all losses. Casing shall be suitable for operation at the pressures specified and constructed of bonderized steel. Coils shall be aluminum or copper, and shall be tested at 400 psi air pressure. Coil face velocity shall not exceed that guaranteed by the manufacturer for no moisture carryover. The air handler shall have a supplemental electric strip heater mounted inside the unit housing. Air handler shall have a single point power connection. Provide electrical disconnect switch adjacent to air handler.

G. All air handling units shall be installed in an emergency drain pan. Allow proper clearance for return air duct connection. Drain pans shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized metal. Pan shall extend 3" beyond the edge of the unit in all directions. The sides of the pan shall be a minimum of 2" high. Contractor shall furnish and install a float switch conforming to UL 508 in the emergency drain pan that is interlocked with the AHU to shut down the unit when the water level in the pan rises above a set level.

H. Refrigerant lines shall be ACR hard copper pipe. Refrigerant lines shall be tested under 200 psi carbon dioxide pressure for 5 hours using soap suds at joints to test for leaks. Evacuate system and charge with refrigerant. Insulate with min. 1" Armaflex, or equal, thermal insulation.

I. Electric temperature control shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer and installed by the Contractor. The thermostat shall be fully automatic and programmable for 7 days. Thermostat shall be complete with fan “Auto-On” switch and system “Auto-Heat-Off-Cool” switch. Thermostats shall be mounted where shown on the Drawings and as required to meet ADA requirements.

J. Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the manufacturer’s recommended breaker and wire sizes. Contractor is responsible for any and all additional costs required to accommodate the selected equipment if manufacturer’s recommendations differ from what is shown on the Drawings.

2.2 DUCT

A. All rectangular ductwork shall be constructed of min. 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Rigid round ductwork shall be constructed of min. 26 gauge galvanized steel.

B. All flex duct is to be Thermoflex M-KE, or approved equal, UL-181 rated, and NFPA-90A and NFPA 90-B approved. Flex duct is to be rated for 6" w.g. positive and 2" w.g. vacuum, with an R value of 6.0 (minimum). Flex duct shall not exceed 4' in length.


C. Round ducts shall tie into the rectangular metal duct/plenum with 26 gauge galvanized steel “Spin-Taps” with balancing damper, scoop, and 2" standoff. Balancing dampers shall be factory installed with spring loaded, retractable bearings, and a positive locking wing-nut for easy adjustment.

D. Outdoor air intake ducts shall be provided with both a manual balancing damper and an automatic damper. The automatic damper shall be provided with a 120V actuator and controlled to open when the HVAC unit is heating or cooling while in occupied mode. The automatic damper shall also have a spring return for normally closed position. Actuators shall be Belimo, or approved equal. A manual balancing damper shall be provided in the return duct to be used in conjunction with the manual balancing damper in the outdoor air intake duct to regulate the required rate of outdoor air.

2.3 INSULATION

A. The air handles and all supply air ducts shall be insulated with minimum R-6 thermal insulation, and all return & fresh air ducts shall be insulated with minimum R-3.5 thermal insulation. Insulation shall be flexible fiberglass insulation with aluminum foil facing. All joints shall be sealed with 2" wide vapor barrier tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PERMITS & INSPECTIONS

A. All local building code inspections, examinations and tests required shall be arranged and paid for by the Contractor as necessary to obtain complete and final acceptance of all mechanical systems. The Contractor shall deliver certificates of all such inspections to the Engineer.

B. Prior to requesting final inspection by the Engineer, the Contractor shall have a complete coordination and adjustment meeting of all of his subcontractors directly responsible for the operation of any portion of the system. At the time of this meeting, each and every sequence of operation shall be checked to assure proper operation. Notify the Engineer in writing ten days prior to this meeting instructing him of the time, date and whom you are requesting be present. This project shall not be accepted until the above provisions are met to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.2 MINOR DEVIATIONS

A. Plans and detail sketches are submitted to limit, explain and define conditions, specified requirements, pipe sizes and manner of erecting work. Structural or other conditions may require certain modifications from the manner of installation shown, and such deviations are permissible and shall be made as required, but, specified sizes and requirements necessary for satisfactory operation shall remain unchanged. It may be necessary to shift ducts or pipes or to change the shape of ducts and these changes shall be made as required. All such changes shall be referred to the Engineer for approval before proceeding. Extra charges shall not be allowed for these changes.

B. The Contractor shall realize that the Drawings could not delve into every step, sequence, or operation necessary for completion of the project without drawing on the Contractor's experience or ingenuity. However, only typical details are shown on Drawings. In cases where Contractor is


not certain about the method of installation of his work, he shall ask for details. Lack of details shall not be an excuse for improper installation.

C. In general, the Drawings are diagrammatic and the Contractor shall install his work in a manner so that interferences between the various trades is avoided. In cases where interferences do occur, the Engineer is to state which equipment, piping, etc. is to be relocated regardless of which item was first installed.

3.3 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall see that all required chases, grounds, holes and accessories necessary for the installation of his work are properly built in as the work progresses; otherwise he shall bear the cost of providing them.

B. Initial cutting and patching shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor with the Mechanical Contractor responsible for laying out and marking any and all holes required for the reception of his work. No structural beams or joists shall be cut or thimbled without first receiving the approval of the Engineer. After initial surfacing has been done, any further cutting, patching, and painting shall be done at Contractor's expense.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Duct work shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the American Society of Heating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration Engineers (ASHRAE). Duct work shall conform to the standards of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s Association (SMACNA), and shall conform to NFPA 90A and 90B.

B. All horizontal ducts shall be supported from the structure above, not from a suspended ceiling system. Factory made turning vanes shall be installed in all square duct turns in the supply ducts.

C. At every point where the duct divides, the Contractor shall provide adjustable splitter dampers. The splitter dampers shall be sturdily constructed, and shall be provided with an indicating type locking damper regulator.

D. Duct work shall be isolated from the air handler with waterproof flexible connections, except where the air handler fan has internal isolation.

E. The entire ducted system shall be air balanced in accordance with industry accepted procedures in the presence of the Resident Engineer.

3.5 CLEANING & ADJUSTING

A. Upon completion of his work, the Contractor shall clean and adjust all equipment, controls, valves, etc. Clean all piping, ductwork, etc., and leave entire installation in good working order.

3.6 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the project. This guarantee shall include furnishing of all


labor and material necessary to make any repairs, adjustments, or replacement of any equipment, parts, etc. necessary to restore the project to first class condition. This guarantee shall exclude only the cleaning and changing of filters.

END OF SECTION 230000 [23 00 00]

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260001-1

Section 26 00 01

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications under this division an integral part of the Contract Docu-ments. The Drawings and Specifications of other divisions of this contract, as well as supplements issued thereto, information to bidders and pertinent documents issued by the Owner's repre-sentative are a part of these drawings and specifications and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above documents will be on file at the office of the Owner's representative and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to examine all Contract Documents shall not relieve the responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of details of other requirements in these Contract Documents.

B. The Contractor shall furnish all work, labor, tools, superintendence, material, equipment and operations necessary to provide for complete and workable electrical systems as defined by the contract documents.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the project site and checking the existing conditions and ascertaining the conditions to be met for installing the work and adjusting his bid accordingly.

D. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that upon completion of the electrical work, each entire system shall be in a finished, workable condition.

E. All work that may be called for in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings; or, all work that may be shown on the drawings but not called for in the Specifications, shall be performed by the Contractor as if described in both. Should work be required which is not set forth in either document, but which work is nevertheless required for fulfilling of the intent thereof; then, the Contractor shall perform all work as fully as if it were specifically set forth in the Contract Documents.

F. The definition of terms used throughout the contract documents shall be as specified by the following agencies:

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

G. The use of the terms: "as (or where) indicated"; "as (or Where) shown"; "as (or Where) specified"; or "as (or where) scheduled" shall be taken to mean that the reference is made to the Contract Documents, either on the drawings or in the specifications, or both documents.

260001-2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

H. The use of the words "furnish," provide," or "install" shall be taken to mean that the item or facility is to be both furnished and installed under this Section unless stated to the contrary that the item or facility is to be either furnished under another Section or under another Contract, furnished under this Section and installed under another Section or under another Contract.

1.2 PERMITS, CODES, & REGULATIONS

A. Secure all permits, licenses, and inspection as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. Give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and contract requirements bearing on the work.

B. The minimum requirements of the electrical systems installations shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code as well as state and local codes.

C. Codes and ordinances having jurisdiction and specified codes shall serve as minimum requirements; but, if the Contract Documents indicate requirements which are in excess of those minimum requirements, then the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be followed. Should there be any conflicts between the Contract Documents and codes, or any ordinances, report these with bid.

D. Determine the exact requirements for the utility service connections and metering facilities as set forth by the utilities that will serve the project, and pay for and perform all work as required by those utilities.

1.3 STANDARDS

A. All materials and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. They shall be new, free from defects, and they shall conform to the following standards where these organizations have set standards:

1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 3. American National Standards Association (ANSI) 4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

B. All material and equipment, of the same class shall be supplied by the same manufacturer, unless specified to the contrary.

C. All products shall bear UL labels where standards have been set for listing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall keep one separate set of prints for making construction notes and mark-ups as detailed in the General Requirements, and shall include the following:

1. Show conduit routing and wiring runs as constructed and identify each. 2. Show all terminal number and schematic changes. 3. Record all deviations from the Contract Documents.

B. Submit set of marked-up drawings for review.

C. Submit operation and maintenance data for all equipment as detailed in the General Requirements.

1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. All manufacturers named are a basis as a standard of quality and substitutions of any equal product will be considered for acceptance unless prohibited under other divisions of these Specifications. The judgement of equality of product substitutions shall be made by the Engineer.

B. Substitutions after award of contract shall be made only within sixty days after the award of contract. Furnish all required supporting data. The submittal of substitutions for review shall not be cause for time extensions.

C. Where substitutions are offered, the substituted product shall meet the product performance as set forth in the specified manufacturer's current catalog literature, as well as meeting the details of the contract documents.

D. The details on the drawings and the requirements of the specifications are based on the first listed item of material or equipment; if any other than the first listed materials or equipment is furnished, then assume responsibility for the correct function, operation, and accommodation of the substituted item. In the event of misfits or changes in work required, either in this Section or other Sections of the contract, or in both; bear all costs in connection with all changes arising out of the use of other than the first listed item specified.

E. Substitutions of products under another Section may occur. Make necessary adjustments and additions to work under this Section to accommodate those substitutions. Such adjustments and additions shall be performed in compliance with specifications at no additional charge.

1.7 CERTIFICATIONS

A. The General Contractor via his subcontractors shall submit the following certifications upon completion of the Project.

1. All motor overload heaters and circuit breakers have been properly selected and installed. Attach a completed form "Motor Overload Heater and Circuit Breaker Data Sheet".

2. All wiring has been properly connected to all equipment in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and the plans and specifications.


3. All electrical systems and subsystems are operating properly and have been operationally tested by simulations of all possible operating conditions.

4. All electronic instruments and switches are calibrated and functioning properly. 5. The emergency generation system and transfer switch (if specified) is operating properly

and has been tested at maximum expected operating conditions. 6. The Graphic Display Panel (if specified) has been tested and is functioning properly. 7. The Distributed Control System (if specified) has been properly connected to all required

equipment, is operating properly and has been operationally tested by simulation of all possible operating conditions.

8. Other certifications as to proper electrical operation as deemed necessary by the Engineer.

1.8 COOPERATION

A. Cooperate with all other trades so as to facilitate the general progress of the work. Allow all other trades every reasonable opportunity for the installation of their work and the storage of their materials.

B. The work under this section shall follow the general building construction closely. Set all pipe sleeves, inserts, etc., and see that openings for cases, pipes, etc. are provided before concrete is placed or masonry installed.

C. Work with other trades in determining exact locations or outlets, conduits, fixtures, and pieces of equipment to avoid interference with lines as required to maintain proper installation of other work.

D. Make such progress in work that will not delay the work of other trades. Schedule the work so that completion dates as established by the Engineer are met. Furnish sufficient labor or work overtime to accomplish these requirements if necessary or directed to do so.

1.9 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical wire and conduit schedules, and interconnection drawings are prepared by the Engineer to assist the electrical subcontractors in estimating the cost of the project and are based on the latest information available from the vendors at the time of design. Once shop drawings are received, changes may be required on the project external wiring to accommodate their latest design and to make the system function properly.

B. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to check with the various vendors before bidding the project and to include monies in his bid to accommodate these requirements since no changes to the contract price will be allowed for these changes.

1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. The plant electrical system is custom designed to the specific requirements of the Owner and the Engineer using a sophisticated control system. The vendors shall custom design their electrical equipment and panels to match these electrical requirements. This means that it is highly unlikely that the vendors standard panels and electrical equipment will be compatible with the requirements of this project. Shop drawings shall be submitted showing external wiring terminals


and shall properly identify the devices to which that they are to be interconnected. At a minimum the drawings shall be prepared with the same engineering effort as can be expected to be utilized in motor control center class 2, type B wiring. Wiring and elementary and control drawings shall be prepared using drawing sizes sufficient to show wiring details clearly and shall have the Owner's name and project on each sheet. All options furnished shall be identified. Any item not furnished shall be entirely deleted from the drawing. Drawings that indicate such things as "if supplied" "these models only" "optional" etc. will be rejected. Any drawings submitted where it is obvious that no effort was made to properly prepare them for easy checking by the Engineer will be rejected.

B. Shop drawings, unless mark-ups are very trivial, will not be returned "approved as noted". They will be returned for resubmittal as many times as necessary. Therefore make every effort to comply with the requirements of this project on the first submittal in order to avoid project delays.

C. The Contractor shall include monies in his bid to strictly adhere to the above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRE & CABLE

A. Single Conductor: All single conductor wire for power and control 480 volts and below shall be stranded copper 600 volts U.L. for wet and dry locations type THWN, THWN-2, XHHW or XHHW-2. Wire for 120 volt general lighting may be solid copper 600-volt type THW or THWN as permitted by NFPA 70.

B. Multi-Conductor: Control cable shall be stranded copper 600 volt U.L. type TC 75 Degrees C wet, 90 degrees C dry and shall consist of individual color coded conductors insulated with 15 mils PVC insulation and 4 mils clean nylon jacket, moisture resistant fillers, lapped core tape and overall PVC jacket.

C. Instrument Cable: Instrument cable for 4-20 ma service unless specified otherwise herein or on drawings shall be single twisted pair stranded copper 90 degree C 600 volt U.L. with 21 mils PVC insulation and nylon jacket, aluminum polyester shield tape and 45 mils overall jacket. Size shall be #16 AWG unless shown otherwise or on drawings.

D. High Voltage Cable: High voltage cable shall be as specified in another section of these specifications.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Mechanical connectors shall be copper alloy bolted pressure type with bronze hardware. Such connectors unless otherwise indicated shall be Square D, OZ/Gedney, T&B, or equal:

Type of Connector Manufacturer (or approved equal)

Single conductor to flat plate connector Square D Type LU, OZ Type XLH

Multiple conductor to flat plate connector Square D LU Series, T&B Type 32000 DB

One bolt parallel connector Square D Type T


Split bolt parallel connector Square D Type CPS, T&B Type TP

Two bolt parallel connector Square D Type KR, OZ Type 5TS

Splice connector Square D Type SS, OZ Type XW

Cross connector Square D Type XP, OZ Type T

Ground rod connector Square D Type CG, OZ Type ABG

Flush floor connector Square D Type GCJ, OZ Type VG

B. Insulated spring wire connectors shall be plated spring steel with thermoplastic jacket. Connectors shall be rated at 150 degrees C continuous.

C. Insulated set-screw connectors shall consist of copper body with flame retardant, 600 V class insulated shell that threads over set-screw body.

D. Terminal connectors for flat-head terminal screws shall be locking spade type with vinyl insulated compression indent tubular wire shaft.

E. Terminal strip connectors shall be channel-mounted type with tin-plated solderless box lugs contained within nylon-insulated separable carriers.

F. Furnish terminal strips complete with channels, channel mounting hardware, and closures, and fittments.

2.3 INSULATING PRODUCTS

A. General purpose electrical tape shall be 7-mil thick stretchable vinyl plastic with pressure adhesive backing, 3M "Scotch #33, Plymouth "Slipknot Grey", or equal.

B. Insulating void-filling tape shall be stretchable ethylene propylene rubber with high-tack and fast fusing surfaces. Tape shall be rated for 90 degrees C continuous, 130 degrees C overload and it shall be moisture-proof. Void-filling tape shall be 3M "Scotch #23," Plymouth "Plysafe", or equal.

C. Arc-proof tape shall be flame-retardant, self-extinguishing compound. Tape shall be resistant to ultraviolet, water, salt water, raw sewage and acids. Arc-proof tape shall be "3M" Scotch #7700, Plymouth "Plyarc", or equal.

D. Insulation putty filler tape shall be elastic, moisture proof rubber compound suitable for bedding and rounding out irregular surfaces.

E. Conduit insulation putty shall be waterproof, stretchable, non-hardening compound suitable for duct seal.


2.4 CONDUIT

A. Detail Specifications will indicate the type of conduit system to be used. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit shall be U.L. listed and shall consist of a metallic interlocking core with an extruded thermoplastic cover.

2.5 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. Conduit fittings shall be compatible with the conduit system used. Outdoor enclosures shall be weatherproof. Insulating bushings shall be non-combustible high-impact thermosetting phenolic with 150 degrees C temperature rating and shall not support combustion.

2.6 CONDUIT BODIES & BOXES

A. Conduit bodies and boxes for pulling and installation of outlets shall be compatible with the conduit system and shall be as follows:

Conduit System

Item Galvanized Rigid Steel Aluminum

Outlet bodies Threaded zinc coated malleable iron with gasketed cast metal covers, Crouse Hinds Form 7, or equal

Threaded copper free aluminum with gasketed sheet aluminum covers. Crouse Hinds Form 9, or equal

Outlet boxes Same as above except Crouse Hinds FD, FS and DS or equal. Outdoor or wet locations to have outdoor covers.

Threaded copper free aluminum with gasketed cast aluminum outdoor covers, Crouse Hinds FD, FS and DS or equal.

2.7 SUPPORT DEVICES

A. Single opening slotted channel supports shall be 2" deep x 1 5/8" wide. Double opening slotted channel supports shall be 4" deep x 1 5/8" wide. All slotted channel members shall be manufactured of ASTM 6063-T-6 aluminum. Furnish nuts, clamps, and hardware that shall be compatible with the slotted channel members.

B. Conduit clamps for use with slotted channel members shall consist of locking aluminum straps with aluminum hardware. All such straps and hardware shall be manufactured of hardened aluminum alloy with less than 0.5% copper content.

C. After-set concrete inserts shall be expansion-shield type with stainless steel hardware, 500 pounds minimum pull-out resistance.

D. Beam clamps shall be hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron. Furnish right angle, edge, or parallel types as required.


E. Nest-back supports shall consist of one-hole pipe clamp with conduit wall spacer clamp-back, all manufactured of hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron.

F. One-hole pipe clamps shall be manufactured of hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron.

G. Surface mounted swivel joints shall be double closed "U" brackets of plated malleable iron with attachment openings top and bottom.

H. Adjustable screw-mounted swinging hangers shall be manufactured of plated steel. Mounting bracket shall have four screw-holes.

I. All thread rod shall be stainless steel, 3/8" diameter (min. size).

2.8 FLOOR BOXES

A. Floor boxes where shown on the plans shall be Walker or equal Type RFB with RAKM11 flush access hatch with carpet trim (or tile trim where tile is used). Unless exact dimensions are shown on the drawings, the exact location of the boxes shall be approved by the Engineer after the furniture type is selected.

B. Floor boxes shall be complete with all required receptacle, telephone, intercom, computer, etc. internal brackets and divider plates.

2.9 CONNECTING LUGS

A. In many instances, due to the long distances between equipment and voltage drop limitation, larger wire sizes may be required that would normally be expected for some items of equipment. The Contractor and equipment vendor shall identify these requirements and provide proper lugs to match the wire sizes.

2.10 IDENTIFYING & TAGGING

A. Individual phases and routing of each power and control circuit shall be identified by appropriate identifying permanent tags, at points near each end of the cables. Yellow plastic tags 2 1/2" x 3 1/2" available from Tags Unlimited., New Orleans, LA or others shall be used for cable I.D. A Sanford Sharpie or equal fine point marker shall be used for writing.

B. All equipment and electrical devices shall be identified. The Contractor and manufacturer shall be responsible for properly identifying and tagging equipment as to safe operation under adverse conditions by personnel normally associated with the proposed facility. Additional signs as the Engineer may require for safety shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor at no additional costs.

C. Voltage warning labels where shown or required by N.E.C or local codes shall be waterproof vinyl with permanent red letters "DANGER 480V (or 240V)", or with other voltage designations. Letters shall be at least 2" high.


2.11 WIRING DEVICES

A. All wiring devices shall be specification grade and shall meet NEMA WD1-1971 requirements. Furnish types of wiring devices as follows:

1. 2P/3W grounding, 20A/125V, NEMA 6-20R; Single receptacle: Hubbell #5361, Arrow Hart #5361, or equal.

2. GFCI receptacle shall be Square D "GFSR-115-B" with NEMA 5-15R style receptacle or "GFSR-120-B" with NEMA 6-20R style receptacle. GFCI receptacle shall be in duplex configuration; that is, top half shall contain test and reset button and bottom half shall contain protected receptacle.

3. Single-pole, single-throw 20A tumbler switch: Hubbell #1223, Arrow Hart #1992, or equal.

4. Single-pole, double-throw (three-way) 20A tumbler switch: Hubbell #1224, Arrow Hart #1993, or equal.

5. Double-pole, double-throw (four-way) 20A tumbler switch: Hubbell #1224, Arrow Hart #1994, or equal.

6. Double-pole, single-throw 20A, tumbler switch: Hubbell #1222, Arrow Hart #1992 or equal.

7. Single-pole, single-throw, momentary center - off 20A tumbler switch: Hubbell #1556, Arrow Hart #1995, or equal.

8. Manual motor starters shall be furnished complete with overloads and shall be Square D Type KO-Z, Westinghouse MS-TO1, or equal.

B. Furnish other types of wiring devices as may be indicated and specified on the drawings.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL

A. Empty raceway pullcords shall be glass fiber reinforced tape that is foot-marked along its length, Thomas "True Tape", Greenlee "Foot-Marked", or equal.

B. Conduit thread compound for use with joining dissimilar metals and aluminum threads shall be conductive, non-galling, and corrosion inhibiting lithium-based compound.

C. Cable pulling compound shall be non-injurious to raceways, conductors, and insulation. Compound shall be non-toxic, non-hardening type.

D. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel in lengths and diameters as indicated and shall be Blackburn, Hubbard, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Except where specifically noted or shown, the locations and elevations of equipment are approximate and are subject to small revisions as may prove necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. Final locations shall be confirmed with the Engineer in advance of construction.


B. Where equipment is being furnished under another Section, request from the Engineer accepted drawings that will show exact dimensions of required locations of connections. Install the required facilities to the exact requirements of the accepted drawings.

C. All work shall be done in the best and most workmanlike manner by qualified, careful electricians who are skilled in their trade. The standards of work required throughout shall be of the first class only and electricians whose work is unsatisfactory to the Engineer shall be instantly dismissed from the work upon written notice from the Engineer. All work must meet the approval of the Engineer.

D. Unless shown in detail, the Drawings are diagrammatic and do not give exact details as to elevations and routing of conduits, nor do they show all offsets and fittings; nevertheless, install the conduit system to conform to the structural and mechanical conditions of the construction. Unless locations and routing of exposed conduits are shown, confirm locations and routing prior to installation with the Engineer.

E. Holes for raceway penetration into sheet metal cabinets and boxes shall be accurately made with a hole punch. Cutting openings with a torch or other device that produces a jagged, rough-cut will not be acceptable.

F. Cabling inside equipment shall be carefully routed, trained and laced. Cables so placed that they obstruct equipment devices will not be acceptable.

G. Equipment shall be set level and plumb. Supporting devices installed shall be set and so braced that equipment is held in a rigid, tight fitting manner.

H. The Contractor shall verify the electrical capacities of all motors and electrical equipment furnished under other Sections, or furnished by the Owner, and request wiring information from the Engineer if wiring requirements are different from that specified under this Section. Do not make rough-ins until equipment verifications have been received.

I. The Contractor shall install all controllers, instruments, Distributed Control System Equipment (if specified), terminal boxes, pilot devices, and miscellaneous items of electrical equipment that are not integrally mounted with the equipment furnished under other Sections. All such equipment shall be securely mounted and adequately supported in a neat and workmanlike manner.

3.2 EXCAVATION & BACKFILLING

A. All excavating and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work shall be performed as detailed in Division 02. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them dry until the work in question has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed.

B. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floors, slabs, forms, beams, piping, finished grades, etc. Ground under conduits shall be well compacted before conduits are installed.

C. All backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free of rocks and debris and shall be tamped as required to prevent settlement.


D. All excavated material not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed to the on-site disposal area. Area shall be as directed by the Engineer.

E. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities prior to any excavating. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are broken into or damaged, they shall be repaired so as to make their operation equal to that before the trenching was started.

F. Where the excavation required the opening of existing walks, drives, or other existing pavement, these facilities shall be cut as required to install new lines and to make connections to existing lines. The sizes of the cut shall be held to minimum consistent with the work to be installed. After installation of new work is completed and the excavation has been backfilled in accordance with above, repair existing walks, drives or other existing pavement to match existing installation.

3.3 CUTTING & PATCHING

A. Cutting and patching required under this section shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner. Cutting lines shall be uniform and smooth.

B. Use concrete saws for large cuts in concrete and use core drills for small round cuts in concrete.

C. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintel or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operations to prevent damage to masonry.

D. Where large openings are cut through metal surfaces, attach metal angles around the opening.

E. Patch concrete openings that are to be filled with non-shrinking cementing compound. Finished concrete patching shall be troweled smooth and shall be uniform with surrounding surfaces.

3.4 WATERPROOFING

A. Provide waterproof flashing for each penetration of exterior walls and roofs.

B. Flashing for conduit penetrations through built-up roofs shall be made with pitch pans filled full with pitch. Conduit penetrations through poured concrete roofs shall be made with sleeves and annulus caulked.

C. Penetrations through walls at below ground elevations shall be waterproofed by conduit sealing fittings or other methods as indicated. This includes all conduit that is located and/or terminated in areas that can transport sewer gases from raw sewage to control panels and other equipment. All local control panels, control stations and motors shall have conduit sealing fittings installed.

D. Interiors of raceways that are likely to have water ingress such as runs from handholes into below-grade installations shall have waterstops installed to prevent water from entering into installations.


3.5 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall provide suitable protection for all equipment, work and property against damage during construction.

B. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for material and equipment stored at the site.

C. Conduit openings shall be closed with caps during installation. All outlet boxes and cabinets shall be kept free of concrete, plaster, dirt and debris.

D. Equipment shall be covered and tightly sealed against entrance of water, dust, dirt and debris.

E. All dry transformers prior to energization shall be protected against moisture and dirt absorption by a suitable covering. Also, maintain heat inside the covering by suitable means to prevent condensation.

F. Interiors of electrical equipment shall be kept clean and dry prior to energization.

3.6 DUCT LINES & PULL BOXES

A. The Contractor shall excavate, backfill, remove excess soil, and furnish material for and install duct lines wherever shown on the plans. Conduit encased in concrete shall have three inch minimum covering of concrete on outside walls of ducts bank, and one inch minimum of concrete between the outside walls of adjacent conduits. The top of the ducts shall in general be 1'-6" below ground unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings or is required to be deeper by N.E.C. or other codes.

B. It shall be the electrical subcontractor's responsibility to determine in advance any conflicts of duct banks with underground obstructions of electrical or any other disciplines and report these anticipated conflicts to the Engineer well in advance of operations such that the conflicts can be easily and economically resolved by all parties.

C. Conduit shall be firmly secured by driving reinforcing rod 12" in ground and tying with No. 10 wire.

D. Where excavation has been made to a greater depth than that required, backfill shall be tamped solid and level to the required depth. All concrete forms shall be removed after the concrete has set, and all trenches shall be backfilled and tamped.

E. Pull boxes shall be installed as shown on the Drawings.

3.7 RACEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install the raceway system to provide the facility with the utmost degree of reliability and maintenance-free operation. The raceway system shall have the appearance of having been installed by competent workmen. Kinked conduit, conduit inadequately supported or carelessly installed do not give such reliability and maintenance-free operation and will not be accepted.

B. Raceway shall be installed for all wiring runs except as otherwise indicated.


C. Exposed raceways shall be installed with their lines parallel to the lines of the building or structure to which they are attached.

D. Conduit runs that enter bottom of floor mounted enclosures that are open on the bottom shall be each equipped with grounding bushing on each conduit.

E. Conduit entries into sheet metal enclosures located inside shall be made with double locknuts and capped with molded bakelite grounding type bushings. Threaded penetration shall expose enough threads to adequately thread on bushing.

F. Conduit entries into NEMA 3, 3R, 4 or 12 enclosures located outside and in wet or damp location inside, shall be made with field-applied watertight hubs. Install locknut inside and cap each conduit with grounding bushing.

G. Conduit runs into boxes, cabinets, and the like shall be set in a neat manner. Vertical runs shall be set plumb. Conduits set crooked or out-of-plumb shall be replaced.

H. Conduits entrances into enclosures shall be carefully planned. Cutting away of enclosure structure, torching and/or cutting away sills, braces and structural members of the enclosure will not be acceptable.

I. Use approved hole cutting tools for entrances into sheet metal enclosures. Use of cutting torch or incorrect tools will not be acceptable. Holes shall be carefully planned and then cleanly cut and they shall be free from burrs, jagged edges, and torn metal.

J. Make-up of some conduit runs will require union fittings or split couplings. Install such fittings where required.

K. Liquidtight conduit shall be used for connections to motors, solenoids, pressure switches, limit switches, unit heaters, fans, motorized louvers, and other devices that may need to be removed for servicing. Each run of liquidtight flex shall be joined with liquidtight flex connectors. Make up each connection tightly; finished connector shall have minimum of 100 pounds pull-out resistance.

L. Empty conduits shall have pull tape installed the length of each run. Identify each terminal as to location of other end. Use blank waterproof label with waterproof ink. Cap exposed open ends of empty conduits.

M. Conduit bodies shall be installed in exposed runs of conduit where indicated and also wherever required to overcome obstructions and to provide access to wires. Covers for such fittings shall be accessible and unobstructed by the adjacent construction.

N. All raceway systems shall be adequately and safely supported. Loose, sloppy and inadequately supported raceways will not be acceptable and shall be replaced. Supports shall be installed at intervals not greater than those set forth under Article 300 of N.E.C. unless shorter intervals are otherwise indicated; or, unless conditions require shorter intervals of supports.


3.8 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Conductors for power and control wiring shall be sized as indicated and where no size is given, the conductor size shall be #12 AWG.

B. Color of power wire insulation and color of phase indicating tape shall be as follows:

Conductor Wire Color Tape Color

Phase A Black or red Red

Phase B Black or red Yellow

Phase C Black or red Blue

Neutral White --

Equipment ground Green --

C. All wiring shall be installed in raceways, except as otherwise specified. No wire or cable shall be drawn into a raceway until the raceway run has been completed, swabbed, and outfitted with specified bushings and fittments.

D. Do not exceed wire and cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Cable pulling compound shall be used as a lubricant for difficult pulls.

E. Carefully handle wire and cable, do not kink, scrape or damage conductors or their insulation.

F. Feeder and branch circuit wiring shall be installed from supply to load without splice, unless otherwise indicated. Branch circuits may be spliced for receptacle, lighting, and small appliance load inside appropriate junction boxes, and inside lighting fixtures.

G. Except as otherwise specified, taps and splices with #10 AWG, and smaller shall be made with insulated spring-wire connectors. Such connectors in damp or wet locations shall have opening in wire nut filled with silicone rubber cement and then wrapped with a layer of EPR tape or spring wire connectors manufactured for this use shall be used.

H. Motor connections made with #10 AWG and smaller wire shall be made up with set-screw copper lugs and with threaded-on set-screw copper lugs and with threaded-on insulating jacket. Where motors are located in damp or wet locations, fill opening under jacket with silicone rubber and cover connector with a layer of EPR tape.

I. Taps and splices in #8 AWG and larger wires shall be made up with copper alloy connectors. Apply over each connector a bedding of insulation putty. Then, apply at least four layers, half-lapped each layer of EPR tape. Finally, apply at least four layers half-lapped each layer of electrical tape.

J. Each wiring connection shall be made up tightly so that resistance of connection is as low as one-foot length of associated largest conductor resistance.


K. Numbered marking labels shall be installed to identify circuit numbers from panelboards and to identify control wiring. Install labels on each wire in each panelboard, junction, and pullbox, and device connection. See "Identifying and Tagging" sections of these specifications.

L. Install numbered marking labels on each control wire termination at each terminal strip. Number selected shall correspond to manufacturer's terminal numbers.

M. Where control wiring terminates onto flat head type terminals, equip each such wire with crimp-type locking spade connector.

N. All wiring inside enclosure shall be neatly trained and laced. Bundle wires into groups and lace with plastic tie-wraps.

O. Install "DANGER 480V (or 240V)" labels on motor control equipment, and on other enclosures such as safety switches, wire-ways, and large enclosures that contain 480V (or 240V) wiring.

P. Install wiring devices where indicated. Each wiring device shall be set with axes plumb and installed with its yoke screws so as to adequately support device and provide grounding means to box. Where ganged devices are shown, install them into ganged boxes.

Q. Each item of equipment shall be adequately and thoroughly grounded. Comply with Article 250 of N.E.C.

R. Equipment grounding conductors into equipment shall be grounded to equipment ground bus or ground lug. Where no ground lugs are provided install ground lug and bond EGC thereto.

S. Where grounding bushings are installed, bond EGC there to end and furthermore ground each bushing lug to equipment ground bus or ground lug.

3.9 GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete grounding system as shown on the Drawings consisting primarily of bare copper conductor and copper clad steel ground rods. All electrical equipment shall be tied to this system either with cable shown or the metallic conduit system per N.E.C. Attach grounding system to metallic buildings as required by N.E.C. weather specifically shown on drawings or not.

3.10 MANUFACTURING OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS

A. All electrical control panels including unit motor starters shall be factory assembled. In no case shall the electrician assemble and wire internal components in the field. The only onsite wiring that will be allowed inside panels is connections of external wiring to factory installed terminal strips.

3.11 NAMEPLATES

A. The electrical subcontractor shall install nameplates on all electrical equipment and devices including remote operating stations that clearly identifies the device. Nameplates shall be sized appropriately for the device and shall be attached with stainless steel screws or double sided tape


suitable for outdoor use, 3M Scotch Brand Very High Bond 4930 or equal. Tape shall cover the entire surface of the nameplate.

B. A nameplate schedule indicating proposed wording and sizes shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

3.12 OVERLOAD HEATERS

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a form entitled "Motor Overload Heaters and Circuit Breaker Data Sheet" which shall contain actual nameplate information on the motors and motor starters which he shall inspect and record. He shall use the appropriate charts and tables supplied with the starting equipment and select, for approval by the Engineer, the manufacturer's recommended overload heaters and circuit breaker settings. Along with the data sheet he shall also submit a copy of the manufacturer's charts and tables. Motors shall not be started until overload heaters and circuit breaker settings are approved by the Engineer.

3.13 CLEAN-UP

A. Remove all temporary labels, dirt, paint, grease and stains from all exposed equipment. Upon completion of work clean equipment and the entire installation so as to present a first class job suitable for occupancy. No loose parts or scraps of equipment shall be left on the premises.

B. Equipment paint scars shall be repaired with paint kits supplied by the equipment manufacturer, or with an approved paint.

C. Clean interiors of each item of electrical equipment. At completion of work all equipment interior shall be free from dust.

3.14 TESTS

A. Each run of power and control wiring shall be tested prior to connection of line and load. Make tests with 1000V dc hand-crank megger. Each run of wiring shall be tested phase-to-phase and/or phase-to-neutral, and phase-to-ground. Test results for each test shall be equal to or greater than 100 megohms with 1000V dc applied. Defective wiring shall be replaced and retested. All tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer.

B. High voltage cables, where used, shall be Hi-Pot tested in accordance with test procedures as outlined in other sections of these specifications or as directed.

C. All equipment shall be put through a trial run-in test to ascertain the performance complies with the intent of the specifications. All run-in tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer.

END OF SECTION 260001 [26 00 01]

DETAIL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 260002-1

Section 26 00 02

DETAIL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work covered by this section shall include furnishing and/or installation of all electrical and instrumentation equipment and necessary wiring systems required to provide the Owner with a complete and operating system.

1.2 SUBMITTALS





A. All electrical equipment shall be UL listed for its intended purpose.

B. The Contractor shall employ and pay for electrical technicians as necessary to insure proper installation, connection, testing, and placing into proper service electrical equipment. Utilize experienced personnel only. Coordinate all work with other vendor’s technicians and service personnel.

C. Perform all work in accordance with the 2014 NEC.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MAIN BREAKER

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install main circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers shall be as follows:

1. Voltage – 240 volts minimum 2. Current – 200 amps 3. Interrupting rating – 18,000 amps minimum 4. Poles – 2 5. Enclosure – NEMA 3R painted steel

260002-2 DETAIL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6. Service entrance rated

2.2 PANEL BOARDS

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install panelboards as shown on the Drawings.

2.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install disconnect switches if and as shown and as sized on the Drawings.

B. For motor loads, switches shall be heavy duty, and horse power rated for the connected load applied. General purpose switches for motor loads are not acceptable.

C. Provide disconnect switches at all other locations as required by NEC.

2.4 LIGHTING SYSTEM

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install lighting equipment as shown on the Drawings. The lighting system is to be a heavy-duty, heavyweight, industrial class system. The Contractor is cautioned that vendors routinely try to obtain approval on lightweight industrial or commercial systems with different materials, lenses, light distribution, ballasts etc. These will not be accepted. Only systems of at least equal quality as that specified will be approved.

2.5 TVSS

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a transient voltage surge suppressor as shown on the Drawings. TVSS shall be Square D SDSA1175, or approved equal, with a peak surge current rating of 36 kA.

2.6 CONDUIT

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit as shown on the Drawings and as required. All conduit on this project shall be of the following types:

1. Above ground exterior conduit - Schedule 40 rigid aluminum. Use cast aluminum outlet boxes.

2. Underground conduit – Schedule 40 PVC. Depth of bury 2’-0” unless noted otherwise. Install electrical warning tape 12” above conduit.

3. Inside building (general lighting & receptacles) – EMT with compression fittings.

B. All Unistrut shall be aluminum or stainless steel with non-corrosive hardware. All other hardware shall be non-corrosive.

2.7 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install one (1) automatic transfer switch as described below. The automatic transfer switch shall be warranted for a period of two (2) years from the date of initial


start-up. Warranty to cover 100% parts, labor and travel of all parts and equipment supplied. Switch shall be as follows:

B. Switch shall have the following ratings:

1. 200 amps continuous current 2. 240 volts 3. 2 pole double throw 4. 18,000 amps interrupting rating minimum 5. NEMA 3R painted steel enclosure

C. The Automatic Transfer switch will be a non-fused fully rated enclosed switch which complies to NEMA ICS2-447, NFPA 70, NFPA 99, NFPA 110, and UL 1008. It shall have front access to all control panels and contacts. Main contact material shall consist of silver (87% min) and cadmium. Plexiglas covers shall shield electronic controls and main contact connections. Wiring shall be numbered for easy identification. The Break before Make transfer action shall be required no more than 3 cycles and the mechanism shall incorporate lifetime lubrication within a temperature range of –29 degrees C to 60 degrees C (-20 degrees F to 140 degrees F). It shall incorporate solid state programmable logic, be assembled and tested, and include:

D. Circuit breaker type switches are not acceptable.

1. Sheet steel NEMA 3R painted steel enclosure with hinged, gasketed, key lockable door. 2. Operating transfer switch consisting of single solenoid, electrically operated,

mechanically held. 3. Solderless connectors for normal source cables, emergency source cables, load cables,

and solid neutral bar. 4. High fault withstanding capacity. 5. Voltage monitoring of each phase of normal source (full protection), adjustable 70 to 90

percent. 6. Voltage of emergency at transfer, 70 to 90 percent (factory set 90 percent). 7. Frequency of emergency at transfer, 70 to 90 percent (factory set 90 percent). 8. Voltage and frequency monitoring of one phase of emergency source. 9. Time delay, engine starting, adjustable 0.1 to 10 seconds, set at 3 seconds. 10. Engine minimum run (5 to 30 minutes) (factory set 20 minutes). 11. Engine Cool down timer factory set 5 minutes. 12. Time delay, normal to emergency (0.1 to 6 second adjustable). 13. Time delay emergency to normal (I to 30 minutes) (factory set 5 minutes). 14. Programmed transition whereby switch will switch to center off position for an adjustable

period of time before transferring to normal power. 15. Three position mode selector switch in the face of the enclosure, marked auto, test, and

fast test. 16. Exceriser (7 days from initial command). 17. Transfer when exercising (on/off switch) 18. Pilot lights in face of enclosure which the ATS is connected. 19. Auxiliary C-form contacts for normal and emergency. 20. Furnish all lugs as required to receive the incoming and outgoing.

260002-4 DETAIL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

21. Internal cabling, terminal boards, fuses, fuse nameplates, and miscellaneous hardware as needed.

22. Software consisting of: dimensional drawing, drawing, electrical schematic, and parts list.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION

A. The Contractor shall disconnect and remove all existing electrical and instrumentation equipment that is not to remain in service at the completion of this Project and which is located in buildings or areas to be renovated. Verify that the equipment is not being used and not going to be used. All removed equipment shall be turned over to the Owner for selection of items that he wishes to keep in stores. All other items shall be properly disposed of by the Contractor.

3.2 COORDINATION WITH POWER COMPANY

A. All work on the service entrance from weather head or pad mounted transformer to utilization equipment shall be per local power company requirements. Where there is conflict with Plans and Specifications with the power company requirements, the power company requirements shall govern. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of making a change for the Engineer’s approval. In some instances, larger wire and conduit sizes may be required. The Contractor shall anticipate this requirement and include it in the Bid price.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the local power company including scheduling and applying for service, furnishing, and/or installing all metering equipment and installing all service entrance weather heads at elevation as required by power company and NEC.

C. Seal all conduits entering panels with duct seal where it is possible that water or moisture shown on drawings or indicated in these specifications). Utilize weather heads for all overhead service wire entering conduit. Where service conduit is installed by power company, the Contractor shall furnish a properly sized weather head to the power company to prevent water from entering any panel in which it terminates.

3.3 COORDINATION WITH FACTORY SERVICEMEN

A. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with the factory serviceman of the various vendors and shall provide whatever assistance is necessary to place the entire system in operation.

3.4 SCHEDULING WORK

A. The Contractor shall schedule and sequence the electrical work such that Owner’s existing systems are kept operational at all times.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete grounding system to provide a safe operating environment. Additional wires for grounding may be required in certain conduit runs. Install as required per NEC. Additional ground rods may also be required to obtain the minimum ground resistance required by NEC. Furnish and install as required to meet the requirements of NEC.


3.6 STARTUP

A. The Contractor is responsible for “startup” of the proposed equipment and systems. Startup shall include any and all required programming, setpoints, testing, etc. as may be required to startup the equipment and systems and to satisfy the Operational Period requirements of the General Requirements.

3.7 OTHER PROVISIONS

A. Where there are conflicts between various sections of the electrical specifications and/or Drawings and/or other sections of the Specifications, then the more stringent wording for a particular product, material, or item of work shall apply unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. Should a discrepancy occur, notify the Engineer before proceeding. The electrical drawings show the general locations of the equipment. The Contractor shall refer to the mechanical and civil drawings to obtain more accurate and the latest location of the equipment as well as to scale the drawings for distances. Equipment shown shall be mounted and placed so as not to violate any OSHA or NEC rules as to working space and obstruction clearance. Seal all conduits entering panels with duct seal where it is possible that water or moisture can enter the conduit due to it location or in case of damage to the conduit (use silicon where shown on drawings or indicated in these specifications).

3.8 GUARANTEE

A. All equipment shall be guaranteed against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of Owner’s final inspection and acceptance, except equipment specifically indicated in these specifications as having an extended warranty period, to the effect that any defective equipment shall be repaired or replaced without cost or obligation to the Owner.

END OF SECTION 260002 [26 00 02]

EARTHWORK 310000-1

Section 31 00 00

EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes excavation and placement and compaction of soil materials for roadways, parking lots, foundation areas, etc.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit test results for imported fill materials to be used to the testing laboratory with a copy to Architect. Soil properties shall be determined as defined in the “Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads & Bridges, 2006 Edition”, Subsection 203.06.

B. Test results shall clearly indicate:

1. Properties of materials and composition including PI, LL, % Organic, % Silt, PH 2. Hardness 3. Compactability. 4. Presence of organic contaminants, whether or not below EPA action levels. 5. Presence of hazardous and/or regulated wastes and contaminants, whether or not below

EPA action levels. 6. Suitability for proposed usage. 7. Testing laboratory shall notify Architect of non-conforming fill material submittals.

C. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of geotextile fabric.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances, including the “Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads & Bridges, 2006 Edition” and the LDOTD publication entitled “Application of Quality Assurance Specifications for Embankment and Base Course”. Where geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or notes on drawings state more restrictive requirements, the requirements of the geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or notes on drawings shall govern.

B. Staking: Staking shall be performed by Land Surveyor currently registered in the state where the Project is located, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. One person only shall be responsible for staking the Project, however, additional staff may be used (under direct supervision of responsible person) for larger projects.

C. Observation of Geotechnical Engineer: Every phase of the earthwork shall be performed under observation and testing directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

310000-2 EARTHWORK

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Soil Report:

1. Soil Report provided by the Owner for design of this Project. 2. Neither the Owner or Engineer guarantees the accuracy of the report nor the continuity

of the soil conditions indicated at boring locations. 3. Portions of the soil report incorporated, either by reprint or reference, into these

Specifications are those which relate to the quality of materials and workmanship and become a part of the Contract Documents. Quantities of excavation and fill materials shall be as indicated on Drawings, or as required by actual conditions as depicted by the soil borings presented in the Soil Report.

B. Existing Conditions: Bidders are expected to visit the site to form their own conclusions as to the character of the Work under this Section.

C. Environmental Requirements: Place, spread or roll fill materials during favorable weather conditions. When the Work is interrupted by rain, do not resume fill operations until evidence is furnished which establishes that moisture content and density of the previously placed fill are as specified.

1. Dewatering: Contractor shall provide necessary temporary drainage improvements to allow dewatering of site as required.

2. Surface drainage: Provide and maintain positive surface drainage during excavation. Prevent infiltration of water into utility or foundation excavations from whatever sources as may exist.

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Work in this section shall be in accordance with the “Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads & Bridges, 2006 Edition”, referred to hereinafter as LSSRB. When the term “Department” is utilized in this specification it shall mean “Engineer”.

B. The measurement and payment requirements cited in the LSSRB are hereinafter modified. Measurement and payment for all work required by this specification section shall be lump sum. Work shall be in accordance with the lines, grades, thickness and sections specified herein or shown on the plans. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to calculate the correct quantities required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 USABLE SOIL

A. Usable soils shall be as identified in LSSRB, Section 203 – Excavation and Embankment.

2.2 IMPORTED FILL

A. Imported fill shall be a silty or sandy clay with a liquid limit less of 30 to 42, plasticity index of 12 to 22 and free from excess silt, organic or other deleterious materials.

EARTHWORK 310000-3

2.3 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. Amoco 4545, or equal, in accordance with LSSRB, Section 1019.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Verify survey data. Stake out work and verify as to location and elevation. Carefully maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points; if disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed.

B. Vegetation shall be removed from all areas to be improved.

C. Exposed subgrade shall be inspected by the Geotechnical Engineer to determine if additional subgrade modification is required.

1. Modifications may include the following: a. Removal of silt soils, decayed organic matter, or other unsuitable materials as directed

by the Geotechnical Engineer. b. Treating subgrade with a stabilization agent such as fly ash, cement, or lime.

D. Remove excess soil to establish design subgrade elevation.

E. Prepare subgrade at road, parking areas, pavement and building areas to proper elevation to receive initial unpaved section.

F. The areas to receive fill or backfill shall be cleared of all organic, soft soils or other deleterious materials and the surface proof rolled. Any remaining soft spots, old foundations, stump holes, etc. shall be excavated to firm material and backfilled.

G. Chemical stabilize subgrade or remove and replace unsuitable soils as indicated on the plans and typical sections and as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

H. If not stabilized with chemicals, the existing subgrade shall be compacted to a depth of approximately 12 inches, to a density no less than 95% of the maximum dry density as attained in the standard compaction test (ASTM D-698). Prior to compaction the moisture content should be

adjusted to within 2% of optimum as determined in the above tests.

3.2 EXCAVATION & EMBANKMENT

A. Excavation and embankment shall be in accordance with LSSRB, Section 203 except as modified or supplemented herein.

B. The fill shall be placed in six inch thick loose lifts and the moisture content adjusted to within 2% of optimum and compacted to 95% standard proctor (ASTM D-698) maximum dry density, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

C. Each compacted layer shall be tested and approved prior to placing the next lift.

310000-4 EARTHWORK

3.3 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. Geotextile fabric shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and LSSRB.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Earthwork operations shall be inspected by the Geotechnical Engineer to verify suitability of subgrades, settlement potential, and to make any additional recommendations.

B. Tests: Inspection and testing of earthwork shall be performed by a testing laboratory in accordance with LSSRB requirements.

1. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. Tests of materials may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. 3. Provide field density test per LSSRB, Subsections 203.12 and 203.13. 4. Soil compaction which does not meet the specified requirements shall be recompacted

and reworked as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, keep areas free of trash and debris. Repair and establish grades in any areas settled, rutted or eroded.

END OF SECTION 310000 [31 00 00]

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 312510-1

Section 31 25 10

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preparation and implementation of a storm water pollution prevention plan (SWPPP) for LDEQ and/or storm water management plan for local permitting.

B. In addition to preparing the Plan(s), the Contractor shall also be responsible implementing the Plan(s) for the management of storm water leaving the Site until final stabilization of the Site.


A. SWPPP’s shall be prepared in accordance with good engineering practice by personnel who have been trained in the preparation of SWPPP’s.


A. LDEQ General Permit for Discharges of Storm Water from Construction Activities Five (5) Acres or More (LAR100000).

B. LDEQ Storm Water General Permit for Small Construction Activities (LAR200000).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor is responsible for making all required submittals to LDEQ and/or local authorities, as applicable. Copies of all submittals shall be provided to both the Engineer and Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials used for implementation of the SWPPP such as silt fencing, hay bales, etc., shall conform to the specifications within the LA DOTD Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SWPPP PREPARATION

A. For construction activities with a ground disturbance equal to or greater than 5 AC the Contractor shall prepare a SWPPP in accordance with the requirements of LDEQ LPDES permit LAR100000. The Contractor shall pay all required annual maintenance and surveillance fees and shall submit the required NOI to LDEQ a minimum of 48 hours prior to the commencement of construction activities. The SWPPP must be completed and implemented prior to commencement of construction activities.

312510-2 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

B. For construction activities with a ground disturbance equal to or greater than 1 AC, but less than 5 AC, the Contractor shall prepare a SWPPP in accordance with the requirements of LDEQ LPDES permit LAR200000. The SWPPP must be completed and implemented prior to commencement of construction activities.

C. Execute the Plan’s certification statement before performing any service identified in the Plan and have a statement from all subcontractors stating that they will abide by the requirements of the SWPPP.

D. The SWPPP shall be amended as necessary to be kept current.

3.2 LOCAL PERMITTING

A. For all construction activities, including those with a ground disturbance less than 1 AC, the Contractor shall be responsible for submitting any required local (municipal or parish) storm water permits.

B. Contractor shall pay all permit fees.

C. Contractor shall develop a storm water management plan as required for the local permit.

D. Contractor shall coordinate all required inspections.

3.3 IMPLEMENTATION

A. The Contractor is responsible for the management of storm water runoff from the site in accordance with the SWPPP and/or local permit storm water management plan. The Contractor is responsible for supplying, installing and paying for all products or materials that will be needed to control storm water runoff in accordance with the Plan(s).

B. Provide day-to-day on-site implementation of the Plan(s).

C. Provide inspections and generate inspection reports in accordance with the requirements of the applicable LDEQ or local permit.

D. Post and display a copy of the SWPPP, NOI, or other indication that storm water discharges from site are approved under NPDES permit and a brief description of the work being performed under the Contract. Information shall be posted at the site in a prominent place for public viewing.

E. Submit Notice of Extension (NOE) and pay additional maintenance and surveillance fees, if required.

F. Retain records in accordance with permit requirements.

3.4 COMPLETION REPORT

A. For construction activities with a ground disturbance equal to or greater than 5 AC the Contractor shall submit a Notice of Termination (NOT) in accordance with the requirements of LDEQ LPDES permit LAR100000.

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 312510-3

B. For construction activities with a ground disturbance equal to or greater than 1 AC, but less than 5 AC, the Contractor shall submit a Small Construction Activity Completion Report to LDEQ accordance with the requirements of LDEQ LPDES permit LAR200000.

END OF SECTION 312510 [31 25 10]

CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE & OPERATOR 323111-1

Section 32 31 11

CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE & OPERATOR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Under this section of the Specifications, the Contractor shall construct cantilever slide gates in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and/or established by the Engineer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Underwriters Laboratory Gate Operator Requirements (UL 325).

B. UL 991 – Standard for Tests for Safety-Related Controls Employing Solid-State Devices.

C. ASTM F 2200-05 – Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction.

D. ASTM F 1184-05 Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates, Type II, Class 2.

E. American Welding Society AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code.

F. ASTM B 117-07 Standard Specification for Salt Spray Testing.


A. Gate manufacturer shall certify gate is manufactured in compliance with ASTM F 2200-05, Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction

B. Gate operator shall be in compliance with UL 325 as evidenced by UL listing label attached to gate operator.

C. The aluminum welders and welding process must be certified. Gate manufacturer shall provide independent certification as to the use of a documented Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record to insure conformance to the AWS D1.2 welding code. Upon request, Individual Certificates of Welder Qualification documenting successful completion of the requirements of the AWS D1.2 code shall also be provided.

D. Manufacturer shall supply gate design performance certification.

323111-2 CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE & OPERATOR

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GATE

A. The cantilever sliding gate system shall be manufactured by Tymetal Corp., 2549 State Route 40, Greenwich, NY 12834 - (800) 328 – 4283, or approved equal.

B. Fortress Heavy Duty Cantilever Slide Gate dimensions shall be as shown on the contract drawings.

2.2 GATE DESIGN

A. Gate track system shall be keyed to interlock into gate frame member (providing 200% additional strength when compared to weld only keyless systems). When interlocked with and welded to the "keyed" frame top member, gate track forms a composite structure.

B. Gate shall have a minimum counterbalance length of 50% opening width which provides a 36% increase in lateral resistance (when compared to ASTM minimum of 40% counterbalance). If gate is ever to be automated, counterbalance section shall be filled with fabric or other specified material.

C. To provide superior structural integrity, intermediate vertical members shall be used - with spacing between verticals to be less than 50% of the gate frame height.

D. Entire gate frame (including counterbalance section) shall include 2 adjustable stainless steel cables (minimum 3/16”) per bay to allow complete gate frame adjustment (maintaining strongest structural square and level orientation).

E. Gate truck assemblies shall be tested for continuous duty and shall have plated steel bearings meeting ASTM B 117-07 salt spray test with no red rust after 790 hours (see 1.02 E). Bearings shall be specifically designed for roller applications with full compliment ball bearings, shock resistant outer races, and captured seals.

F. Gate truck assemblies shall be supported by a minimum 5/8” plated steel bolt with self-aligning capability, rated to support a 2,000 # reaction load.

G. Hanger brackets shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with a minimum 3/8” thickness that is also gusseted for additional strength.

H. Gate top track and supporting hangar bracket assemblies shall be certified by a licensed professional engineer to withstand a 2,000 lb. vertical reaction load without exceeding allowable stresses.:

2.3 GATE COMPONENTS

A. The gate frame shall be fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy extrusions. The top member shall be a 3" x 5" (76mm x 127mm) aluminum structural channel/tube extrusion weighing not less than 3.0 lb/lf (4.4kg/m). To maintain structural integrity this frame member shall be "keyed" to interlock with the “keyed” track member. If fabricated as a single horizontal piece, the bottom member shall be a 2" x 5" (51mm x 127mm) aluminum structural tube weighing not less than 2.0


lb/lf (2.9kg/m). If fabricated in two horizontal pieces, the bottom member shall be a 5" (127mm) aluminum structural channel weighing not less than 2.6 lb/lf (3.8kg/m). When the gate frame is manufactured in two horizontal pieces or sections, they shall be spliced in the field (the gate frame shall be fabricated in one or multiple sections depending on size requirements or project constraints).

B. The vertical members at the ends of the gate frame shall be “P” shaped in cross section with a nominal base dimension of no less than 2” x 2” (51mm x 51mm) and weighing not less than 1.6 lb/lf (2.3kg/m). Major 2” x 2” (51mm x 51mm) vertical members weighing not less than 1.1 lb/lf shall separate each bay and shall be spaced at less than gate height intervals.

C. Intermediate vertical members shall be 1” x 2” (25mm x 51mm) weighing not less than .82 lb/lf and shall alternate between 2” x 2” major members.

D. The gate frame shall have a separate semi-enclosed “keyed” track, extruded from 6005A-T61 or 6105-T5 aluminum alloy, weighing not less than 2.9 lb/lf (4.2kg/m). The track member is to be located on only one side of the top primary. Welds to be placed alternately along the top and side of the track at 9" (229mm) centers with welds being a minimum of 2" (51mm).

E. Diagonal "X" bracing of 3/16" (5mm) minimum diameter stainless steel aircraft cable shall be installed throughout the entire gate frame.

F. 2” x 2” x 9 gauge aluminized steel chain link fabric shall extend the entire length of the gate (if operated gate, counterbalance must also have fabric to prevent reach through and comply with ASTM F2200, see 1.03 C.1) Fabric shall be attached at each end of the gate frame by standard fence industry tension bars and tied at each 2” x 2” (51mm x 51mm) vertical member with standard fence industry ties. ASTM F2200 requires attachment method that leaves no leading or bottom edge protrusions (cannot exceed 0.5 inch).

G. Gate to be mill finish aluminum

2.4 POSTS

A. A single set of support posts shall be minimum 4" O.D. (102mm) round Schedule 40 or 4” x 4” x 3/16” wall square steel tubing, grade 500. Gate posts shall be galvanized or coated and supported in concrete footings as specified on the Drawings.

2.5 GATE MOUNTING

A. The gate frame is to be supported from the track by two (2) swivel type, self-aligning, 4-wheeled, sealed lubricant, ball-bearing truck assemblies.

B. The bottom of each support post shall have a bracket equipped with a pair of 3” (76mm) UHMW guide wheels Wheel cover protectors shall be included with bottom guides to comply with UL325.

C. Gap protectors shall be provided and installed, compliant with ASTM F 2200-05.


2.6 GATE OPERATOR

A. Gate operators shall be Model H-10 as manufactured by Viking Access Systems, 631 Wald, Irvine, California 92618, or approved equal.

2.7 GATE OPERATOR DESIGN

A. UL 325 and 991 listed. UL 325, Class I, II, III, and IV vehicular gate operator.

B. Operation: 24 V DC with 1 HP motor.

C. Maximum Gate Weight: 2,000 lbs.

D. Maximum Gate Length: 45 feet.

E. Maximum Operating Speed: 12 inches per second.

F. Operating Temperature: Minus 4 degrees F to 158 degrees F.

G. Maximum Duty Cycle: 100 percent; continuous cycle.

H. Power: 120 or 220 V AC, single phase. Built-in power selector switch. Consumption Current: 3 A at 120 V AC and 1.5 A at 220 V AC.

I. EMI Filter and Lightning Protection: For AC line up to 6 kV, 3 kA.

J. Chassis: 6-gauge steel, zinc plated and powder coated.

K. Control Board Enclosure: Aluminum, powder coated.

L. Logic Board: Multiple-stage built-in lightning-strike protection up to 20 kV and 10 kA. Redundancy design in hardware and firmware. Built-in battery charger. Regulated power supply for external accessories up to 1 A. Multiple-stage short circuit protected. Fail-safe/fail-secure connector. Auto open in case of power failure.

M. Cover: UV-stabilized polyethylene. Easily removable, allowing access to entire gate operator.

2.8 OPERATION

A. Entrance and exit operation using a remote control and timer.

B. Keyed interlock for hold open.

C. Photo eyes for safety override.

2.9 CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall be Class “R” in accordance with the Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges. Portable mixing of concrete in accordance with Engineer's specifications will be permitted for small quantities of concrete.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Contractor shall perform all required grade work for establishing a level area for proper gate operation. Final grades and installation conditions shall be examined by the Engineer. Installation shall not begin until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 CONCRETE POST ANCHORAGE

A. The Contractor shall consolidate concrete by tamping or vibrating. Tops of footings shall extend slightly above ground and shall be steel troweled to a smooth finish sloped to drain away from posts. Posts, braces and other units shall be centered in footings. Excess excavation from footings shall be disposed of satisfactorily.

3.3 GATE ERECTION

A. Equipment in this section shall be installed in strict accordance with the company’s printed instructions unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

B. Verify gates are properly installed and move freely in both directions.

C. Verify gates are plumb, level, square, and without sag or damage.

D. The gate and installation shall conform to ASTM F 1184-05 standards for aluminum cantilever slide gates, Type II, Class 2.

E. If the gate system is to be automated, the gate and installation shall also comply with ASTM F 2200-05 and UL 325.

3.4 OPERATOR INSTALLATION

A. Install gate operators in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Install gate operators plumb, level, square, and secure on concrete pads.

C. Concrete pad dimensions shall be as required by the manufacturer or as shown on the Drawings.

D. Install gate operators weathertight.

3.5 COATING REPAIR

A. After completion of fence and gate installation, any damaged protective coating shall be satisfactorily repaired.

3.6 SYSTEM VALIDATION

A. The complete system shall be adjusted to assure it is performing properly. The system shall be operated for a sufficient period of time to determine that the system is in proper working order.


B. For operated gate systems - test and explain safety features:

1. Each system feature and device is a separate component of the gate system. 2. Read and follow all instructions for each component. 3. Ensure that all instructions for mechanical components, safety devices and the gate

operator are available for everyone who will be using the gate system. 4. The warning signs shipped with the gate operator must be installed in prominent position

on both sides of the gate. 5. Ensure the Owner is clear with regard to the safety points concerning the basic

operational guidelines of the safety features of the gate operator system. These safety points are listed in the gate operator manual and must be read prior to system use.

3.7 WARRANTY

A. The truck assembly shall be warranted against manufacturing defects by the manufacturer for a period of (5) five years from date of sale.

END OF SECTION 323111 [32 31 11]

CHAIN LINK FENCING 323113-1

Section 32 31 13

CHAIN LINK FENCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Under this section of the Specifications, the Contractor shall construct fences and gates in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and/or established by the Engineer.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Fencing shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification RR-F-191 for Type A fencing.

B. The same type chain link fencing and privacy slats shall be used throughout the Project. The same type, shape and treatment of posts shall be used throughout a section of fence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FENCING

A. Fencing shall be a chain link fence with steel posts set in concrete, and all corners, gates and gate posts as required by the Drawings and as stipulated herein.

B. Structural steel shapes, plates and bars shall be hot-dip galvanized. Welded members shall be galvanized after welding.

C. Height of fencing shall be as shown on the Drawings.

2.2 FABRIC

A. Fabric shall be of No. 9 gage copper bearing open hearth steel wire, woven in a two-inch (2") mesh, and shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process after weaving.

B. Fabric shall be built into the gate frame by means of stretcher bars and adjustable bolt hooks.

C. Along the bottom of the fence, between posts, the fabric shall be fastened by ties to a tension wire of 9 gage, minimum, galvanized coil spring steel of good commercial quality.

323113-2 CHAIN LINK FENCING

D. The top edge of the wire fabric shall be smooth with no barbs permitted. The bottom edge shall have a twisted and barbed salvage.

E. Fabric shall be attached to, and supported by terminal and gate posts by means of 3/4" x 1/4" hot-dip galvanized tension bars, secured to the posts by means of heavy galvanized fittings.

2.3 POSTS

A. All posts shall be heavily galvanized by the hot-dip process after fabrication.

B. All posts shall be of such length that they may be embedded in concrete foundations to a depth of not less than 36 inches.

C. All posts shall be fitted with watertight, malleable iron caps.

D. Posts shall be of the following minimum dimensions:

Post Outer Diameter Weight

Line 2.375” 3.65 lbs./ft.

Terminal 4.000” 9.10 lbs./ft.

Gate, 6’ or less 4.000” 9.10 lbs./ft.

Gate, larger than 6’ 6.625” 18.97 lbs./ft.

2.4 RAILS & BRACING

A. All top rail shall be 1 5/8 inch O.D. steel pipe, weighing not less than 2.27 pounds per linear foot, and shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process. The top rail shall pass through the bases of the top caps and form a continuous brace from end to end of each stretch of fence. Top rails shall be provided with expansion rail couplings and shall be securely fastened to gate and terminal posts by means of suitable hot-dip galvanized connections.

B. All end, gate, corner and angle post shall be suitable braced by means of 1 5/8" O.D. steel pipe weighing not less than 2.27 lbs. per linear foot, set in horizontal position, with adjustable truss braces, of not less than 1/2" tots and turnbuckles, between terminal and first line posts, complete with all fittings hot-dip galvanized. Swing gates shall be provided with auxiliary side braces where necessary.

2.5 GATES

A. Gates shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings. Gates shall be fabricated by the manufacturer of the fence in which they are installed. Hinges shall be of heavy malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized. Bottom hinges shall be of the ball and socket type, arranged for padlock locking. Gates shall be constructed entirely of not less than 2 inch O.D. pipe weighing 2.72 pounds per linear foot. Fabric for the gates shall be the same as specified for the fence.

CHAIN LINK FENCING 323113-3

B. Gates of a different design from that shown on the plans may be furnished with prior approval. Gates shall be of rigid construction, and after erection shall not show sag or warp. The maximum allowable width for a single swing gate is 13'. If required, the gates shall be equipped with a bottom roller for ease of opening.

2.6 BARBED WIRE

A. Barbed-wire (if required on the Drawings) shall consist of three (3) strands of 12½ gage wire with 14 gage 4 point barbs spaced approximately five inches (5") apart. All wire shall be zinc coated with a minimum coating of .80 ounces per square foot of surface area on 12 1/2 gage wire and .60 ounces per square foot of surface area on 14 gage wire.

2.7 PRIVACY SLATS

A. Privacy slats (if required on the Drawings) shall be of extruded high density polyethylene, color pigment, and UV inhibitors specifically designed to withstand the harmful effects of the sun.

2.8 CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall be Class “R” in accordance with the Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges. Portable mixing of concrete in accordance with Engineer's specifications will be permitted for small quantities of concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. In general, spacing between line posts shall not exceed 10'. Where breaks in a run of fencing are required, or at intersections with existing fences, appropriate adjustment in post spacing shall be made for the type closure indicated.

B. When posts, braces or anchors are to be embedded in concrete, the contractor shall install temporary braces as required to hold posts in proper position until concrete has set sufficiently to hold posts. No material shall be installed on posts or strain placed on bracing set in concrete until 72 hours after concrete has been placed.

C. Tops of posts shall be set to required grade and alignment. Wire shall be stretched taut.

3.2 CONCRETE POST ANCHORAGE

A. The Contractor shall consolidate concrete by tamping or vibrating. Tops of footings shall extend slightly above ground and shall be steel troweled to a smooth finish sloped to drain away from posts. Posts, braces and other units shall be centered in footings. Excess excavation from footings shall be disposed of satisfactorily.

3.3 FENCE ERECTION

A. Pull posts shall be placed not more than 200 feet apart in straight runs and at each vertical angle more than 20 degrees. Corner posts shall be placed at each horizontal angle more than 20

323113-4 CHAIN LINK FENCING

degrees. Corner and pull posts shall have a horizontal brace and tie rod on each side of posts. The horizontal brace and tie rod shall be connected to adjacent line posts.

B. Posts shall be permanently positioned, anchorages firmly set, and top rail or tension wire satisfactorily secured to posts before fabric is placed. Ends of fabric shall be secured by stretcher bars threaded through loops of fabric and secured to posts by clamps with bolts and nuts.

C. Fabric shall be placed by securing one end and applying sufficient tension to remove all slack before making attachments elsewhere. Degree of tensioning shall be commensurate with air temperatures at time of installation to prevent undue sagging or tensioning of fabric due to changing temperatures. Fabric shall be fastened to line posts at approximately equal spaces and to top rail (or top tension wire) and bottom tension wire with tie wires or bands as specified.

3.4 GATE ERECTION

A. Gate installation shall include gate frames, stretcher bars, filler fabric, latches, stops, locking device, padlocks, hinges, gate posts with braces, tie rods, turnbuckles, caps and other fittings as specified or required for complete installation.

B. Clamps for attaching hardware shall be tightened. Bottom of gates shall clear the ground at least 3 inches at all points in its swing. The Contractor shall grade the area if necessary to meet this requirement. Stops with latches or other approved means for holding the gate open shall be provided, placed to prevent damage to gate or fence by overswing. Unless otherwise directed, stops shall be provided at the centerline of fence to arrest the swing of a closed gate.

3.5 COATING REPAIR

A. After completion of fence and gate installation, any damaged protective coating shall be satisfactorily repaired.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground rods shall be installed along each segment of new or rebuilt fence, regardless of type fence post used, at maximum 500-foot intervals, or in areas where electrical lines cross the fence. Ground rods shall be copper clad 5/8"x8'. Connection to the fence shall be by means of a mechanical connection UL listed for this purpose which joins the fence post, fabric, and ground wire together. Ground wire shall be #6 copper. Top of ground rod shall be buried approximately 4".

3.7 REBUILT FENCE

A. When specified, the Contractor shall take down, move back and rebuild existing fence. Fence shall be rebuilt in the same manner as specified for new fence. Rebuilt ornamental fence, picket fence or other special type fence shall be equal in all respects to existing fence.

END OF SECTION 323113 [32 31 13]

TURF CONSTRUCTION 329219-1

Section 32 92 19

TURF CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section of work consists of providing a suitable turf on all areas within the site where designated on the Drawings. Finish grading and stockpiling of topsoil are covered in other sections of these specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EROSION CONTROL MATTING

A. Erosion Control Matting shall be a flexible mat of vinyl monofilaments bonded together into a three-dimensional web designed to serve as an erosion control and revegetation mat. The mat shall be engineered with the balance of web density, porosity, flexibility, and weight to provide armor cover that resists erosion while allowing a naturally vegetated ground surface to establish.

B. The vinyl mat shall be resistant to environmental and chemical degradation and shall have the following typical properties:

1. Porosity Calculated 85-90% 2. Flexibility ASTM D1388 2000 mg-cm (max.) 3. Weight ASTM D3776 24 oz/SY (min.) 4. Thickness ASTMD1777 0.25 in. 5. Tensile Strength ASTM D1682 (2” strip)

a. Length direction 18 lb. b. Width direction 6 lb.

6. Elongation ASTM D1687 (2” strip) a. Length direction 150% (max.) b. Width direction 100% (max.)

2.2 FERTILIZER

A. Fertilizer shall be 5-10-5.

2.3 SEED

A. Grass seed shall have a minimum live seed content of 85%.

B. The Contractor shall plant seed during one of two periods described below and on the following basis, the period selected being dependent on the time of the completion of grading operations unless otherwise shown on the Drawings:

1. March 15 – June 1: 40 lbs. of hulled Bermuda grass seed per acre

329219-2 TURF CONSTRUCTION

2. October 1 – December 1: a seed mixture containing equal parts of Bermuda seed (with hulls) and Rye grass seed at a rate of 40 lbs. per acre.

2.4 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydro-seeding shall consist of mixing and applying seed, commercial fertilizer, water management gel, polyacrylamide tackifier, and mycorrhizal inoculum with wood fiber and water.

B. Seed and commercial fertilizer shall be uniformly spread over the area at the rates specified in the Seeding section above.

C. A minimum of 535 pounds of wood fiber per acre (600 kg/ha) shall be mixed and applied with the seed. The fiber shall be in addition to straw or mulch when straw or mulch is specified. The contractor will be permitted to include fertilizer and lime in the seeding slurry for application during hydro-seeding operations.

D. The application rate for pellet-inoculated seed shall be determined using the seed mass exclusive of inoculant materials.

E. The materials and the quantities thereof to be mixed with water shall be submitted for approval. The quantity of water shall be as needed for application. Prior to planting, the Engineer will approve the varieties of seed to be used.

F. A dispersing agent may be added to the mixture provided the contractor furnishes evidence that the additive will not affect germination., Any material considered detrimental, as determined by the Engineer, shall not be used.

2.5 SOD

A. Sod shall consist of live, growing grass secured from sources where the soil is fertile.

B. Sod to be placed during the dormant stage of those grasses shall be inspected by the Engineer to verify that the grass is live and acceptable.

C. Bermuda grass sod shall have a healthy, virile root system of dense, thickly matted roots throughout a 2 inch minimum thickness of native soil attached to the roots.

D. The sod shall be free from obnoxious weeds or other grasses and shall not contain any matter deleterious to its growth or which might affect its subsistence or hardiness when transplanted. Sod shall be the same type grass as adjacent acceptable grass which is to remain in place.

E. Care shall be taken at all times to retain the native soil on the roots of the sod during the process of excavating, hauling and planting. Sod material shall be kept moist from the time it is dug until planted. When so directed by the Engineer, the sod existing at the source shall be watered to the extent required prior to excavating. Sod material shall be planted within 3 days after it is excavated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCOPE

A. All areas within the site which are designated on the Drawings to be turfed, and those areas where the elevation of the existing ground must be altered to attain the lines and grades shown on the Drawings by excavating or by filling, thereby leaving exposed soil or earth surfaces, shall be turfed by seeding, hydroseeding, or sodding as called for on the Drawings to control erosion and for beautification purposes.

3.2 GROUND PREPARATION

A. Prior to the commencement of tilling and smooth grading, all large stones and waste materials shall be removed from the site. All heavy growths or vegetation on the site which may seriously interfere with smooth grading, tilling, or sowing or sodding operations shall be mowed, raked and burned, used for mulch if suitable, or disposed of off the site. During tilling operations the ground surface shall be kept cleared of all materials which might hinder subsequent turfing operations.

B. The areas to be seeded or sodded shall be thoroughly prepared to a minimum depth of three (3) inches by disking, harrowing, cultipacking, or by other means approved by the Engineer. Tilling shall continue until the condition of the soil is acceptable to the Engineer as suitable for the type of seeding or sodding to be used.

C. The entire area shall be finish graded and the surfaces left at the grades shown on the Drawings in an even and properly compacted condition which will prevent the formation of low places where water will stand.

3.3 FERTILIZING

A. Fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly over the areas to be turfed at the minimum rate of 600 pounds per acre or the approved equivalent. Distribution shall be by hand or by a common fertilizer distributor, or other approved equipment. Use of a grain or seed drill, equipped to sow seed and distribute fertilizer at the same time will be permitted.

B. Fertilizer shall be incorporated to a minimum depth of three (3) inches and may be done as a part of the tilling operations, except that fertilizer shall not be applied more than 48 hours prior to sowing the seed. The incorporating may be included as part of the discing or harrowing operations, providing it is done just prior to sowing seed or placing sodding.

3.4 SEEDING

A. After the ground surface has been prepared and fertilized as specified above, all designated areas shall be seeded with grass seed. The Contractor shall employ a method of sowing satisfactory to the Engineer, and where practical he shall make use of approved power drawn drills or seeders, or other approved equipment. The sowing shall be stopped when satisfactory results are not likely to be obtained due to excessive moisture conditions, high winds, or other unfavorable conditions.

329219-4 TURF CONSTRUCTION

B. After sowing and prior to compacting, the area shall be cleared of all objects that may interfere with subsequent mowing. Immediately after sowing the entire area shall be compacted by approved rolling equipment to reduce air pockets.

3.5 HYDROSEEDING

A. After the ground surface has been prepared as specified above, all designated areas shall by hydro-seeded.

B. Mixing of materials for application with hydro-seeding equipment shall be performed in a tank with a built-in continuous agitation system of sufficient operating capacity to produce a homogeneous mixture and a discharge system which will apply the mixture at a continuous and uniform rate. The tank shall have a minimum capacity of 962 gallons (3700 L). The engineer may authorize use of equipment of smaller capacity if it is demonstrated that the equipment is capable of performing all operations satisfactorily.

C. Any mixture containing polyacrylamide tackifier shall not be applied during any rainy weather or when soil temperatures are below 41oF or if the wind speed is above 20 miles per hour. Pedestrian traffic or equipment shall not be permitted to enter areas where hydro-seeding has been applied.

3.6 SODDING

A. After the designated areas have been completed to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Drawings and as provided for in other items of the Contract, sodding of the type specified shall be performed in accordance with the requirements hereinafter described. Sodding shall be Bermuda grass, St. Augustine or other acceptable grass, as shown on the Drawings.

B. At locations shown on the Drawings or where directed, sod blocks shall be carefully placed on the prepared areas. The sod shall be so placed that the entire designated area shall be covered, and any voids left in the block sodding shall be filled with additional sod and tamped. The entire sodded areas shall be rolled or tamped to form a thoroughly compact, solid mat. Surfaces of block sod, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, may slide due to the height and slope of the surface or nature of the soil, shall, upon direction of the Engineer, be pegged with wooden pegs driven through the sod blocks into firm earth, sufficiently close to hold the block sod firmly in place.

C. When necessary, the sodded area shall be smoothed after planting has been completed and shaped to conform to the cross section previously provided and existing at the time sodding operations were begun. Any excess dirt from the planting operations shall be spread uniformly over the adjacent areas or disposed of as directed by the Engineer so that the completed surface will present a sightly appearance.

D. The sodded area shall be thoroughly watered immediately after it is planted and shall be

subsequently watered at such times and in a manner and quantity directed by the Engineer until completion and final acceptance of the project by the Owner.


3.7 ESTABLISHING TURF

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care of seeded and sodded areas during the period when grass is becoming established. The Contractor shall protect the area against traffic or other use by placing warning signs as approved.

B. The Contractor shall mow the entire turfed area at such times as necessary and just before the final inspection.

3.8 REPAIRING

A. If the surface becomes gullied or otherwise damaged during the period covered by this Contract, the affected areas shall be repaired to re-establish the grade, the soil and the turf as directed and as provided in this specification.

B. Compacting of fill material shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of grading specifications. Any necessary repairing will be by the Contractor at his own expense.

END OF SECTION 329219 [32 92 19]

WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT 333423-1

Section 33 34 23

WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes furnishing and installing a complete extended aeration wastewater treatment facility with all necessary parts and equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1.3 DESIGN

A. The Extended Aeration waste water treatment facility shall provide primary and secondary treatment of the waste water flow and shall be as manufactured by Gainey's Concrete Products and distributed by Delta Process Equipment, or approved equal. The waste water treatment facility shall be a model MO-DAD-1, INC.500S, or approved equal, capable of treating 500 gallons per day of sanitary sewage and shall be designed and built to serve a population equivalent of 5 persons with a total loading and treatment capability of 0.85 pounds of BOD5 per day. Treatment of the daily waste water flow shall be accomplished by the extended aeration process. The plant shall be designed to provide an effluent quality of 30mg/l of BOD5 and 30mg/l TSS.

B. Primary treatment shall be accomplished in the aeration chamber of the facility. All incoming waste water shall enter and be retained in the aeration chamber for twenty-four hours. Air shall be introduced along one wall near the bottom to produce a mixing and rolling action in the tank. Two thousand one hundred cubic feet of air shall be pumped into the aeration chamber for each pound of BOD applied per day. The spiral rolling action created by the introduction of air shall insure thorough mixing of the incoming organic material with the activated sludge present in the chamber. In addition, the spiral flow pattern shall prevent short circuiting of the flow and assure adequate retention of all organic materials.

C. Secondary treatment of the waste water shall be accomplished in a clarification chamber. Mixed liquors shall flow from the aeration chamber into the clarification chamber by hydraulic displacement. The effective holding capacity of the clarifier shall be calculated after excluding the lower two-thirds, by height, of the hopper(s) and shall still be of sufficient volume to provide in excess of four-hour retention of the daily flow. The chamber shall de designed so that the clarifier will successfully perform its function of solids separation without hydraulic upset even when the significant runoff period is eight hours.

333423-2 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

D. Treatment of the daily waste water flow shall be accomplished by the Extended Aeration process. The plant shall be designed to treat non-industrial sewage to provide an effluent quality of 30mg/l of BOD5 and 30mg/l TSS.


A. Capability of a plant of this type to perform as outlined, when built by an approved manufacturer, shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory. The manufacturer shall make certified data available to the regulator agency, customer, consultant and contractor as required.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. The manufacture shall warrant the equipment against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year under normal use and service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AERATION CHAMBER

A. The aeration chamber shall have a minimum capacity of 548 gallons to provide twenty-four hour retention of daily waste water flow. The chamber shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum of eighty cubic feet of tank capacity per pound of applied BOD5. Concrete fillets shall be installed in the bottom of the chamber parallel to the treatment flow to insure uniform tank roll and prevent deposition of solids. Overall design of the chamber shall be such that effective mixing shall be maintained to provide optimum treatment.

2.2 AIR DISTRIBUTION PIPING

A. Schedule 40 PVC and fittings shall be used throughout the air distribution system. Individual pipe unions, dresser couplings and flexible couplings with stainless steel clamps shall be provided as necessary in the air distribution piping as required to allow individual adjustment of each separate element within the system.

B. Primary air distribution shall be provided through a PVC air header. The air header shall have individual drop pipes connected to the header assembly for air supply to individual diffused assemblies. Each drop pipe shall be equipped with an air adjustment valve to control air flow individually to each diffused assembly. In addition, a quick release coupling or union shall be provided for each pipe diffuses assembly downstream from the air adjustment valve.

2.3 AIR DIFFUSION SYSTEM

A. Diffusers shall be provided parallel to the treatment flow in the aeration chamber. Each diffuser assembly shall be installed no more than twelve inches off the floor of the chamber nor more than twelve inches away from the chamber sidewall. Diffusers shall be constructed of SCH40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic and shall be designed to insure uniform mixing within the aeration chamber. Fine air bubble distribution effected by the diffusers shall be adequate to provide all oxygen necessary for the Aerobic Digestion process while maintaining an acceptable dissolved oxygen level in the final plant effluent.

WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT 333423-3

2.4 CLARIFIER

A. A final clarification chamber shall be provided for secondary treatment of the daily flow. It shall be provided for a minimum capacity of 190 gallons. The effluent weir shall be of sufficient length to provide an overflow rate of 500 gallons per lineal foot per day at peak hourly flow and surface area of the tank shall provide a setting rate of 272 gallons per day per square foot at peak hourly flow.

B. The clarifier shall be constructed of properly reinforced 5,000 PSI, 28 day compression strength concrete. Each casting in the clarifier shall be monolithic unit with all four walls incorporated into the tank section. The clarifier shall consist of essentially four independent zones operating together to provide satisfactory solids separation. An inlet baffle zone shall be provided at the flow inlet to the clarification chamber. All transfer turbulence shall be dissipated upstream, of the inlet baffle and its performance shall be adequate to eliminate all turbulence downstream from the baffle. The area contained behind the baffle shall allow adequate capacity and retention for surfacing of all buoyant material entering the clarifier. The baffle shall extend above the surface and adequate distance to entrap all floating material and it shall extend below the transfer port a sufficient distance to eliminate passage of buoyant material or surface turbulence.

C. Flows shall be directed out of the inlet baffle zone into the hopper zone. All transfer shall be accomplished below the bottom of the inlet baffle into the upper one-third area of the hopper zone. In this zone, sludge shall settle by gravity to the bottom hopper(s). The hopper(s) shall have sloping sidewalls directing all sludge to the bottom near the airlift pump inlet(s). Maximum area at the base of the hopper (s) shall be one square foot. Here settled sludge shall be returned to the aeration chamber by continuous airlift pumping.

D. Clarified liquids shall be contained in the settling zone above the hopper area for additional gravity settling. From here they shall be hydraulically displaced to the outlet zone. The outlet zone shall consist of an adjustable side plate effluent weir trough and outlet baffle. The outlet baffle shall extend into the surface of the liquid to a point not exceeding three inches and shall extend above the surface an equal distance. The baffle shall run the entire length of the outlet zone and shall totally separate the surface liquids of the settling and outlet zones. Centered in the outlet zone parallel to the outlet baffle shall be an effluent weir trough with two adjustable v-notched side plates. The trough shall be capable of being adjusted from end to end to provide adequate fall to the plant outlet and the side plates shall each be capable of being leveled from side to side and end to end to the level of the liquid surface in the chamber.

2.5 AIR PUMP

A. Air pump shall be diaphragm type providing a minimum of 1.25 SCFM. Motor shall be 115V.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Individual sewage treatment systems shall be installed only by individuals who are licensed through the State of Louisiana’s Office of Public Health.

333423-4 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

B. Installation of the system must comply with the plans and specifications detailed on the temporary permit approved by LDH.

END OF SECTION 333423 [33 34 23]